Home

Teledyne T802 User's Manual

1. 1 2 4 5 s ISOLATED 0 20MA OPTIONAL BOARDS vec Taco un pAcaonm v voa 5 ume TS GND sd AC emis ANALOG VOLTAGE amp CURRENT OUTPUT DN vec at 11020 vo FE BEAD 10 2 DIGITAL Clo u 3 cs cm EPI 22 1 217 0 2 S0000421 15 Ez MAINS 0 15 uF cea 5 n im E v3 m 1a I 1 doc ax gen OU 007 aak M TRNBU CK A 21 4 ad Dt c 10 we Lia eai EE a D His 1 a gt Nee 3 jaz AGND2 tl enu E s i 10000 pil Es aru zone os i 10 085 2 D SHON vere Sc 46 ma cis c voc I cov 1 1 015 uF ceramic jis 8 C20 DAC RANGE amp OFFSET PROGRAM pF id s sw 23 G 27 t 2 121 4 H pete
2. 6 MI MIS lt CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS z Ta e v A T TM 10 5 10 5 T 33v 9 4 FBL 9 4 FBIG 3 a 3 7 1 T 2 1 FBMHSZIGHMSOINT 1 FEMHSZIGHMSOINT gt FB2 Scr gt 7 R6 Xi SRi SRS 0039300100 0039300100 10K 10K 210K FBMHSZIGHMSOINT FBMHSZIGHMSOINT UD QUR aHSyo Mode sv GND aE gt 97 Back iDrive aro RAG FBMHSZIGHMSOINT van lo N 202 Mode 419 201 22uF 6 3V c2 Enie 42 0 5 206 cr JMKSIGBJ226KL 0 0022 aVem v m2 il d CA 112 DS intemal Dithering B noi pe o aR4 aRS 1 Disable 3 aR6 Ee aRT 9 1 15 16 Scan Directi FB4 3 4 2 Lo 17 18 Direction aB2 aB3 UID UR Scan Dir 6 o 284 0 zm Lo 1 s FBMHSZIGHMSOINT aB6 7 1 0 DURL G 6 0 0 UDRL 2 9 o 226 T 1 1 DULR eu ay
3. 1 E a E D iE pares zen 2 ep OPAZZTTUA 1 soe 5 1 am 1 H s E Yoo E 10 10 m cu mi 7 INeUrs 0 15 a 108 35V TANTALUM mm d N MixomriNZ Mikom vs 000282 a s n Y d R45 m x gg E MEET N3 ws vm Seultogves 5 ans je far sensors 23 TH aN le 0 15 uF cog m BINI 12 0538 commi cie ouput s 1 as TEM s v TONo coum m mn imn ewe d PI n pm 7 ss i 7 15 Jour 35V TANTALUM GND 7 mH i i m ok A acit gt Sis ai LE ume 548 mI Rag 200 Ee 4 z558 2 vs 5 vec sv mm eje ape csi o ps cami RNIA 100K AI RS0000287 SV RAT and RAB reduce the gain p for analog inputs by 1 asv Fire td B JIO 2 DCASAEAMBZ 88 above fil cale to p
4. From ICOP CPU CHASSIS 0 CHASSIS To LCD Display Ul VADS 44 po yom L 4L YoN 7 45 pi yor O YO P VADE 47 p2 VAD9 48 gip SEP R Header 22X2 VADIO 35 Y2N n D4 Y2M VADII 3 34 1 3 DS Y2P Y2N VADO VADI VBDIO 4 3 4 D6 26 CLKIN YLP VAD2 VBDII 6 CLKIN SG x 7 07 CLKOUIM CLKOUT N eg ADO D8 32 CLKOUT P YLN VAD6 LEES VAD7 VADI 79 ps CLKouTP CLKOUTT vier VADS nb VADI VAD2 10 pig REPE VADIO B E VADIT vans 2 DIT SHTDN m 43 3V nA SS 15 16 D12 gt CLKOUT 10 i d VBD3 15 VBD4 16 19 20 D14 2 CLKOUT N o VBDS 18 pi VBD2 A 9n VBD3 VBD6 19 pis vcc A I o VBD4 35 VBDS VBD7 20 pi o VBD6 e c VBD7 22 Dia E 23 pis LVDSVCC gt VBDIO ai oD VBDII VBDE 25 020 PLLVCC 5 ES T SB OE veccik 221 5 VLDSGND 42 to 35 36 RI GND 36 VBDE i VLDSGND gt 37 38 R2 10K 7 GND l 39 40 zy GND En 41 42 GND PLLGND 5 en 46 GND BLGND 228 G3168 05000101 00 SN75LVDS84A i BACKL 3 3V 2 yo P B YO N YLP 2 5 YIN YZN CLKOUT N W 18 CLKOUT 433V 13 14 Header 7X2 spi S 1 c2 cs cs c7 co cu Tite 2 6 JMK316BJ226KL 0 01 fooi Joi fooi
5. Analog Outputs Status Control Outputs Outputs TEST CHANNEL OUTPUT Aout 4 1 8 1 6 CO optional Aout 3 Optional i Current I Range 2f Aout 2 fier Outputs Touchscreen Range 1 a Aout 1 Flow Pressure Sensor H gt Analog Outputs Extemal Digital ls DIA transmitter board Sample Flow Sensor Power b Circuit PC 104 g CPU Card 5 Disk on E AID Module M Converter Flash Oz Box Chip Concentration Temperature E Status MOTHERBOARD Talemal Thermistor Interface Digital VO Bus Sensor Temperature RELAY PCA Sensor Temperature Temperature ro m LED ensor Heater s L Figure 12 7 1802 Electronic Block Diagram 12 5 2 ELECTRONIC OPERATION OF THE CO SENSOR The CO is powered by 12 VDC from the analyzer via the relay card which outputs a 0 5 VDC analog signal to the analyzer s CPU via the motherboard that corresponds to the concentration of measured by the probe 07275B DCN6418 227 Principles of Operation Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Serial VO LEDV8 LEDV9 Not Used ii J12 Purple wire e 22awg y To Pi Prob DE Orange wire So ay CPU 1900 22awg e S 2 oo OVD
6. 1 3 a E D CONTROL INPUTS RNS Tm 4708 RN un D 1skes 2 an bot B 5 PS27024 8 ps noo n 16 2 Do ij Dr MN 2 we v BE 1 B 14 tee Ps Di N Di 1 xl 1 unm pe 05 EXER 8 1 Ex CONTA 5 122 FE BEAD Y BEI E 1 4 7 10 CSET 10 E 19 s TERMBLOCK 10 10000 pF T ala 38 our B a B a a 5 10000pF Ra ROS 0S R26 100 1008100 R30 104 100 e 100 100 B E 330 pF sop 330 pF sov PS27024 cuu T its 330 pF sov 2 skis 3 14 Tn T L25FE BEAD E Place these termination resistors at tbe end of cach data line Each data ie i bod be laid out as a dai chin the signal pasing w from one IC to the nent a 8 10000 pF 3 m 1 a RNA vi DS iskat abp lt 529 2 18 Do npe vis Ie EE TEE p s 1 16 2 5 AS OE 17 05 EXTERNAL 2 T xt xov CONTROL 2 15 TI DT E i D ARE 3 i Y IN o T 4 5 17 gt HE 2 wm A 10 FEBEAD S E A TERMBL amp ul 9 10 EXT SV OUT prae A Schematic for E Series GS Motherboard PCA PN 05802 4 al 10000 a b a FS 05803 Dac NIPCHMCRVSSOIETEEner Mn 1 2 3 a
7. i EXHAUST GAS Flow Pressure Mec Sensor pressure 1 SENSOR 4 1 1 Sample Gas Flow Control AME PUMP 200 AES 1 Figure 3 18 T802 Internal Gas Flow with CO Sensor Option IMPORTANT Leak Check Run a leak check once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made check all pneumatic fittings for leaks using the procedures defined in Section 10 3 3 07275B DCN6418 51 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 3 4 STARTUP FUNCTIONAL CHECKS AND INITIAL CALIBRATION IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA The analyzers cover must be installed to ensure that the temperatures of the internal components are properly controlled If you are unfamiliar with the theory of operation we recommend that you read Section 12 For information on navigating the analyzer s software menus see the menu trees described in Appendix A 1 3 4 1 STARTUP After the electrical and pneumatic connections are made an initial functional check is in order Turn on the instrument The pump and exhaust fan should start immediately The display will show a splash screen and other information during the initialization process while the CPU loads the operating systems the firmware and the configuration data The analyzer should automatically switch to
8. 1 z 3 D Jm DES FEMALE mu Xi Tu a i i Comi xm 1 Tor Comt d E bs a har A m T ze TVARRAY LED RED LED GRN zu 1204 SMDAISLCe fs ES SV A AS 10 m ici 2 8 3 mel 5 T0 1 8 CIS ne 3 RECN X ad s H Sane 8 RTS RISI i 7 crs i B CIS n 10 DBO 10 ee SEIN INLINE 12 n M EM TNs Ty ARRAY 51001 Es co AAA AA Rs SWSLIDEAPDT NOTINSTALLED NOTINSTALLI 7 2 2 pe NOT INSTALLED wmon SMDAISLOC es MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MTS MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTINGHOLE MOUNTING HOLE mia T b GnYRETASV D D i Mis MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTINGHOLE MOUNTINGHOLE MOUNTINGHOLE MOUNTING HOLI RM uv ern vec dmn 2 Amb 5 10 35V TANTALUM 5 a mn 10 35V TANTALUM D DI D9 amp R35 mms te vilia 1 15 MARS40CT NOT INSTALLED e Schematic for E Series GS Motherboard PCA PN 05802 Nude Rei FS ossoa Duc 1 z 3 3 07275B DCN6418 072758 DCN6418
9. 1 2 3 5 5 Ts AVddi H04V Li RS R9 309K C 0001 cuum i ay Re 33y 2 58 e i et TT 22uF 6 3V MBRMI2OLTIG RIO Tes 1 GMKI07BJI05KA 1 2 806K GMK107BJ105KA cae gt IK RIS 0 3 4 CAT4139TD GT3 FDV3osN RIG x B 464K E 3 a Ris oma BACKL Y lt RIT jumper c Default R27B av Rm 10K Default R31B 10 GMKIO7BJI05KA Backlight Brightness Control Control Mode R22 R27 R31 Remote Video Port NO A NO Remote DC YES B NO fleece Fixed Bright default NO B B sv GND D Title GUI Interface Siz Number Revision S 06698 n Date 6724 2010 Sheet 20f 4 File N3PCBMGR 106696 P2 R3 schdoc DrawnBy RT 1 2 3 5 6 07275 6418
10. HEN J11 J12 556 NC CTS DSR DTR RXD Figure 3 13 Connector Pin Outs for RS 232 Mode To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem there are activity indicators just above the RS 232 port Once a cable is connected between the analyzer and a computer or modem both the red and green LEDs should be on e If the lights are not lit use the small switch on the rear panel to switch it between DTE and DCE modes e f both LEDs are still not illuminated make sure the cable is properly constructed RS 232 MULTIDROP OPTION CONNECTION When the RS 232 Multidrop option is installed connection adjustments and configuration through the menu system are required This section provides instructions for the internal connection adjustments then for external connections and ends with instructions for menu driven configuration Note Because the RS 232 Multidrop option uses both the RS232 and 2 DB9 connectors on the analyzer s rear panel to connect the chain of instruments COM2 port is no longer available for separate RS 232 or RS 485 operation 42 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY Printed Circuit Assemblies PCAs are sensitive to electro static discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system Failure to use ESD protecti
11. l D1 RED Watchdog Indicator Figure 12 12 Status LED Locations Relay 12 5 4 2 WATCHDOG CIRCUITRY The most important of the status LEDs on the relay board is the red Bus watch dog LED It is controlled directly by the analyzer s CPU over the Bus Special circuitry on the relay PCA watches the status of D1 Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds indicating that the CPU or bus has stopped functioning this Watchdog Circuit automatically shuts off all heaters 12 5 5 HEATER CONTROL 12 5 5 1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL At low magnetic field strengths levels paramagnetic molecules follow Curie s law to good approximation which indicates that the susceptibility of paramagnetic materials is inversely proportional to their temperature To minimize the effects of temperature variations on the O concentration measurement the parametric sensor is raised to a high temperature level 50 A cartridge heater implanted into the sensor is the heat source The temperature of the sensor is measured by a thermistor also inserted into the sensor body 12 5 6 MOTHERBOARD This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including A D conversion digital input output PC 104 to translation temperature sensor signal processing and serves as a pass
12. 0 12 07275B DCN6418 072758 DCN6418 gue Un i Di m D3 Di Ds D6 D Ds vccc DIGITAL OUTPUTS 1527024 16 15 14 13 12 u of bf 44 SF 527024 16 15 14 13 10000 pF 10000 pF RESETTABLE FUSE 03A 60V ur p TEBEAD DIODE SCHOTTKY EXT 45V OUT ATUS OUTPUTS ewa pr Schematic for E Series G5 Motherboard PCA PN 05802 Was 05803 0 13 0 14 1 2 3 D 5 D veces Fl DIGITAL OUTPUTS RN PS27024 son 1 16 D mem Tanes 2 i
13. Lor foo LVDS Transmitter Board L4 L4 x Size Number Revision A 06882 B Date 57772010 Sheet Tof 1 File NAPCBMGR 06882 PI RO SchDoc Drawn By 9 0 19 0 20 06 1 6 01 2KV vd 75 2 R13 R20 CHASSIS C18 a 75 3 4 2 SP3050 n I ATX 2 NE 2 ATX 1 i 16 3 ARX 4 15 4 LEDO 3 14 5f LEDO 6 13 6 ARX 7 LEDI 8 AS LEDI 7 10 9 9 STRAIGHT THROUGH ETHERNET DF11 8DP 2DS 24 CHASSIS CONN_RJ45_LED 1 M 45V 45V ISO TP2 P2 SDA P3 lol n 1 2 a 2 4 Vbb2 3 3 t 4 4 11 LME0505 5 5 1 SL GNDI GND2 T 7 2 2 RIO Header 8 C SC Header 8 22k T 100uF TP3 ol ISO GND GND Title Auxiliary Board PWR ETHERNET Size Number Revision DCN 6092 A 06731 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED Date 5 6 2011 Sheet lof 3 File NAPCBMGR 06731 1_ETHERNET Schp rawn By RT 1 2 3 4 07275B DCN6418 072758 DCN6418 M CHASSIS V BUS RII 22k il Ds4 C 0 tuF ww elsi E FPF RST RIS SUSPEND DTR 12_ SUSPEND RxD 5 3 Dt 4 CS DF 4 5 D DSR
14. CALCO2MP 2 ST ENTR MPLE GAS TO CAL 02 Press CO2 then coz ENTR to initiate span a point calibration of the sensor Press ENTRto change 2 25 c the OFFSET amp SLOPE par ter nie values for the i STRIZERO SPAN measurement The SPAN button now 3 Press EXIT to leave the appears during the transition calibration unchanged and from zero to span PRECOZ MP return to the previous You may see both buttons TST TST gt ENTR ONC menu If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to appear see the y CALCOZMP CO2 STB XXX chapter on Troubleshooting ERETT returns to SAMPLE menu 07275B DCN6418 181 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank 182 07275B DCN6418 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE 07275B DCN6418 183 Section Technical Information Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank 184 07275B DCN6418 10 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE amp PROCEDURES The T802 Paramagnetic Oxygen Analyzer utilizes a technology that is non depleting and requires very little maintenance However there are a minimal number of simple procedures that when performed regularly will ensure that the analyzer continues to operate accurately a
15. ISETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL D CLK MORE EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU In all cases IM VARS DIAG EXIT EXIT discards the new t setting X ENTER PASSWORD 818 ENTR accepts the new setting 8 8 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to enter ry the correct PASSWORD 0 DAS_HOLD_OFF 15 0 Minutes I DAS HOLD OFF 15 0 Minutes ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to set the iDAS HOLDOFF time 1 STABIL_GAS 02 period in minutes MAX 20 minutes PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT 27 STABIL GAS NO 02 ENTR EXIT Use these buttons to select which gas will be reported 2 TPC ENABLE ON A by the STABIL test function NEXT JU EDIT CO2 is only available if TPC ENABLE ON the optional sensor is installed 7 ON ENTR EXIT Toggle to tum on orturn OFF temperature pressure NEXT compensation PREV NEXT JUMP y 5 CONC_PRECISION AUTO EV NEXT JUMP EDIT CONC_PRECISION AUTO 1 2 3 4 ENTR EXIT 1 Use these buttons to selec SETUP X X 6 CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day the precision of the concentration display JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT ISETUP X X CLOCK ADJUST 0 Sec Day 0 0 Enter sign and number of ry seconds per day the clock gains
16. INTERVAL BAUDRATE TEST PORT QUIET m COMPUTER 90 INSTRUMENT 1 HESSEN PROTOCOL GATEWAY IP ES 38400 ENTER PASSWORD 818 SUBNET MASK 57600 E 7 1 RS 485 1 E Series only appears if optional Ethernet PCA is SECURITY installed When Ethernet PCA is present COM2 MULTIDROP PROTOCOL submenu disappears ENABLE MODEM 2 Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON 1 amp MODE submenu above 3 instrument IP gateway ip amp subnet mask are only HARDWARE HANDSHAKE editable when DHCP is OFF HARDWARE FIFO TCP PORT L HOSTNAME Although TCP PORT is editable regardless of the dhcp COMMAND PROMPT ON state do not change the setting for this property 5 HOST NAme is only editable when DHCP is ON ACAL is a special configuration consult factory OFF T Series only Figure A 5 Secondary Setup Menu COMM amp VARS A 6 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 818 Goto DIAG Menu Tree SAMPLE SETUP CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE COMM VARS ID INET HESN COM1 com2 ENTER PASSWORD 818 1 ENTER PASSWORD 818 Goto COMM VARS Menu SET SET EDIT COMM VARS Menu Tree Tree VARIATION RESPONSE MODE GAS LIST STATUS FLAGS TYPE1 TYPE2 BCC TEXT CMD PREV NEXT INS EDIT PRNT O2 110 REPORTED CO2 111 REPORTED GAS TYPE GAS ID REPORTED
17. Signal Name Bit or Channel Number Description A status outp uts U24 J1017 pins 1 8 bits 0 7 default I O address 323 hex ST SYSTEM OK 0 0 system OK 1 any alarm condition ST CONC VALID 0 conc valid 1 warnings or other conditions that affect validity of concentration ST CAL MODE 2 0 in calibration mode 1 measure mode ST CAL SPAN 3 0 calibrating span 1 calibrating zero ST CAL RANGE2 4 0 calibrating range 2 1 calibrating range 1 ST CAL 2 5 0 calibrating CO2 1 calibrating O2 6 7 Spare B status outputs U27 J1018 pins 1 8 bits 0 7 default I O address 324 hex 0 7 Spare Front panel Pc keyboard default address 4E hex MAINT_MODE 5 input 0 maintenance mode 1 normal mode LANG2_SELECT 6 input 0 select second language 1 select first language English SAMPLE_LED 8 output 0 sample LED on 1 off CAL_LED 9 output 0 cal LED on 1 off FAULT_LED 10 output 0 fault LED on 1 off AUDIBLE_BEEPER 14 output 0 beeper on for diagnostic testing only 1 off Relay board digital output PCF8575 default PC address 44 hex RELAY_WATCHDOG 0 Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep relay board active 1 3 Spare CO2 CELL HEATER 4 0 CO sensor cell heater on 1 off O2 CELL HEATER 5 0 Oe sensor cell heater on 1 off CAL VALVE 6
18. T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Table 11 6 DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE FROM TEST POINT TO TEST POINT MIN V MAX V NAME NAME 51 5 Dgnd 1 5 2 4 85 5 25 51 15 15 4 13 5 16V 51 45 15 5 A3 5V 16V 51 Dgnd 1 0 05 0 05 PS1 Chassis Dgnd 1 Chassis N A 0 05 0 05 52 12 6 12 7 11 75 12 5 PS2 Dgnd 6 Dgnd 1 0 05 0 05 11 6 3 PC BUS Operation of the bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the Relay Board in conjunction with the performance of the front panel display Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact the bus is operating properly if D1 the relay board is flashing or 01 is not flashing but pressing a button on the touchscreen results in a change to the display 11 6 4 TOUCHSCREEN INTERFACE Verify the functioning of the touchscreen by observing the display when pressing a touchscreen control button Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly if pressing a control button on the display does not change the display any of the following may be the problem The touchscreen controller may be malfunctioning The internal USB bus may be malfunctioning You can ve
19. The default averaging time optimized for ambient pollution monitoring is 60 seconds for stable concentrations and 10 seconds for rapidly changing concentrations See 12 5 9 for more information What is the averaging time for this instrument 11 9 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE If this manual and its troubleshooting service sections do not solve your problems technical assistance may be obtained from Teledyne API Technical Support 9480 Carroll Park Drive San Diego California 92121 5201USA Phone 800 324 5190 toll free in North America Phone 858 657 9800 direct Fax 858 657 9816 Email sda_techsupport teledyne com Website hitp www teledyne api com Before you contact Teledyne API s Technical Support fill out the problem report form in Appendix C which is also available online for electronic submission at http www teledyne api com forms 218 07275B DCN6418 Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 12 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The T802 parametric oxygen analyzer is a microprocessor controlled analyzer that determines the percent concentration of molecular oxygen O2 in a sample gas drawn through the instrument It uses a paramagnetic sensor that relies on the relatively high reactivity of O molecules to magnetic fields to generate a current that is proportional to the amount of O present in the sensor chamber Calibration of the instrume
20. Create edit the name of the channel ra pum PERIOD Cycles through L d NUMBER OF RECORDS i ths DAS channel PREV NEXT RS 232 REPORT Sets the time lapse between S CHANNEL ENABLE each report CAL MODE Cycles through list of available trigger ON events 7 PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT OFF 1 ves o ray dele ui YES NO Sets the maximum number of parameters for this records recorded by this channel channel SET SET gt EDIT Editing an existing DAS channel will erase any PARAMETER SAMPLE MODE PRECISION data stored on the channel options 2 Changing the event for an existing DAS channel DOES NOT erase the data stored on the channel PREV NEXT INST AVG MIN ACAL is a special configuration consult factory Cycles through list of available amp 1 1 currently active parameters for this channel Figure A 4 Primary Setup Menu DAS 07275B DCN6418 5 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 SAMPLE SETUP DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE COMM VARS DIAG ID INET HESN 1 2 07 ENTER PASSWORD 818 ENTER PASSWORD 818 Go to lt SET SET gt EDIT PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT COMM Hessen Menu Tree lt SET SET gt EDIT 0 DAS_HOLD_OFF 1 STABIL_GAS 2 TPC ENABLE 3 DYN ZERO 4 DYN SPAN 5 CONC PRECISION 6 CLOCK 7 SERVICE CLEAR 8 TIME SINCE SVC 9
21. SETUP HOSTNAME T802 SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP HOSTNAME T802 BUTTON FUNCTION cH CH INS DEL ENTR EXITI Moves the cursor one character to the left Moves the cursor one character to the right Inserts a character before the cursor location Deletes a character at the cursor location Press to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion 0 9 A Use these key to edit the HOSTNAME 2 rossana O SO Accepts the now selling and retums to the previous menu E ea tts erasing arara too SETUP XX HOSTNAME T802STATION 2 Buttons appear only as applicable SHUG SINS DELO ENTR ENTR accepts the new setting EXIT ignores the y new setting IsETUP XX INITIALIZING INET 0 INITIALIZATION process proceeds automatically SETUP XX INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED SETUP INITIALIZATION FAILED SETUP XX COMMUNICATIONS MENU Contact your IT Network Administrator ID INET 1 2 EXIT The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 07275B DCN6418 123 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 6 4 USB PORT FOR REMOTE ACCESS The analyzer can be operated through a personal computer by downloading the TAPI USB driv
22. T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 3 5 AUTOMATIC INDIVIDUAL CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS To use the AUTO CAL feature to initiate an automatic calibration for an individual analog output select the ANALOG CONFIGURATION submenu see Section 5 9 3 then press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET CAL Continue pressing SET until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V OVR NOCAL SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE 5V SET EDIT Continue pressing SET until DIAG AIO CONC OUT ALIBRATED NO SET CAL EXIT DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 2 DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 CALIBRATED YES SET SET CAL EXIT 07275B DCN6418 97 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 3 6 MANUAL CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS CONFIGURED FOR VOLTAGE RANGES For highest accuracy the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated Note The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only appear if the AUTO CAL feature is turned off for the channel being adjusted See Section 5 9 3 3 Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals and by changing the actual output signal level using the front panel keys in 100 10 or 1 count incr
23. RANGE 50 0 PPM ENTR EXIT TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONC CO2 SPAN CONC 12 00 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new 0 1 6 o 0 ENTREXIT Setting and retums to the previous display ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu The CO span concentration value automatically defaults to 160 If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the CO calibration gases 07275B DCN6418 179 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual 9 5 3 ACTIVATE CO SENSOR STABILITY FUNCTION To change the stability test function from O concentration to the CO sensor output press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX TST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS ACAL RANG PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM SETUP ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X 0 DAS_HOLD_OFF 15 0 Minutes lt PREV NEXT gt JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT Press EXIT 3 times to return to SAMPLE menu SETUP X X 1 STABIL GAS O2 PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT CO and O STABIL GAS O2 options only appear if ENTR EXIT associated sensors are installed 7 STABIL GAS CO2 02 ENTR EXIT NOTE Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to O2 when the CO calibration procedure is
24. USB B 33V REG USB33V 33v A gt 1 cos TF DN DP x 9 1 USB33V OUR 32 3 C37 0 01uF u eS IT 3 us R35 To new TScreen 4 1 70553 004 w scc m 3 our 2 Uspiav 1L RL a RSV CHASSIS GND 3 d De bd its D USB A R A To old TScreen mo TSHARC I2C E a sv GND BUS 5 FBS A veus FBMH3216HM50INT USB A VERT CHASSIS 5 RBIAS En e E jim d 5V GND FBIO OSAV C42 CHASSIS Ei svGND HS 5V GND 4 4 wv 052 0 1uF i i i al GRN ip 1 0 USB A_VERT sv GND Au 3 5 ae Un E pr t sv GND FBI2 05A 6V 645 sv GND Configuration Select Mode R32 R45 5 Default A A MBUS B B Ee Install 100K for A 0 Ohm for B GUI Interface Number Revision E 06698 5 Du 242010 Sheet 31 4 File NAPCBMGRI 106696 P3 R3 schdoc Drawn By RT 5 6 07275B DCN6418 D 17 0 18 1 2 3 5 6 A TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE CIRCUITRY TBD FBIS FBMH321GHMSOINT
25. 241 T0000 pF 15 0 15 uF ceramic 42770 Install 24 for 167 on th Sl eal 10000 pF 2 E Ww mos u 1 Y i 5 13 1 49 py 10000 pF 2 wn R37 if4 20 mA 5 E nth channel 1532 sels onmes not used Bi m e 2 133 DAC I2BIT mov 2 5 a 5 DAC ca p BOUT voa DAN 4 2 io E Eee DUALDAC A2 DAN e 4 Lu OPARZTIUA 516 z 218 24 8 21 2 9 9 MICRORIT A0 E Hg ja oms spo OPA4277UA S we 5 Rig RIG 5 a gt a AGND2 1 0Pa2277 sung 85 vec 8 8 D7 usc 19 10 pon Ps CIE uet estf a X W33 OPAGTIUA MBRS340CTNZ ux e Le wA 2 u Schematic tor E Soros GS Motherboard PN 05802 7 T 13 Tone Melo M X en 05803 B Orcad B Date CET NI Fis NSPCEMGR SEDIRTE ssmEs on SSS USETT 1 2 3 D 5 0 9 0 10
26. EX instructed to by Teledyne API s Customer Service ersonnel SETUP xx lt SET gt EDIT EX SETUP xx HOSTNAME T802 lt SET SET gt EDIT Ext Both TCP ports BETUPXX _ONLINE ON are inactive when this is set for OFF SE Tr ED EXT SETUP XX INITIALIZING INET 0 INITIALIZATION process proceeds automatically BETUPXX INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED SETUP XX INITIALIZATION FAILED SETUP xx INE COMMUNICATIONS MENU x Contact your IT Network Administrator The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is special configuration consult factory 120 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 6 3 2 MANUALLY CONFIGURING THE NETWORK IP ADDRESSES There are several circumstances when you may need to configure the interface settings of the analyzer s Ethernet card manually e your LAN is not running a DHCP software package e DHCP software is unable to initialize the analyzer s interface e wish to create a static IP recommended 1 Connect a cable from the analyzer s Ethernet port to a Local Area Network LAN or Internet port 2 Access Ethernet configuration through SETUPPMORE COMMPINET 3 Follow the setup sequence as shown in the illustrations that follow and edit the Instrument and Gateway IP addresses and Subnet Mask to the desired settings From the computer enter the same information through an app
27. PUT VEUs mes DoD VBUS 4 g VREG 5 GND VBUS GND Un USB sse el CP2102 1 5 2 wal DH 25 C26 0 147 1uF 3 PL a ne ne NUP2202W1 GND GND MTI MT HOLE MT HOLE CHASSIS CHASSIS DCN 6092 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED V BUS zo c22 0 1uF 0 tuF L28 c 24 cy 1 C2 cip 2 Ve 3 Toi TXD B 1_ 13 10 RTS B 7 12x oe TO2 ILDTR B EB TB TO3 lt DSR 19 4 RXD B 1 NC ROI RII TXD 18 3_CTS B RO2 RD RTS 17 6 DSR B 3 RO3 RB DIR 16 7 DCD B 2 ijuod RM S RIB 1 ROS RIS g RI GND 4 STAT ROI SHTDN GND DF11 10DP 2DS 24 SP3243EU 0 RI4 a 0 GND RIS Title Auxiliary I O Board USB Size Number Revision A 06731 Date 5762011 Sheet 2of 3 File NAPCBMGR 06731 2_USB SchDoc Drawn By RT e 4 D 21 0 22 5V ISO RO e 2 lt E e 499 5V ADC AGND Hs C27 zi 4 TuF C2 C3 c4 c5 c6
28. CO2 FILT ASIZE Samples 12 1 300 CO moving average filter size in adaptive mode 2 FILT DELTA 96 2 0 1 10 Absolute change in CO2 concentration to shorten filter CO2 FILT PCT 96 10 0 1 100 Relative change in concentration to shorten filter CO2_FILT_DELAY Seconds 90 0 300 Delay before leaving CO2 adaptive filter mode 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Range Description Units Value CO2 DIL FACTOR 1 0 1 1000 Dilution factor for CO Used only if is dilution enabled with FACTORY_OPT variable CO2 CELL SET C 50 30 70 CO sensor cell temperature set point and warning limits Warnings 45 55 CO2 CELL CYCLE Seconds 10 0 5 30 CO cell temperature control cycle period CO2 CELL PROP 1 0 10 CO cell PID temperature control proportional coefficient CO2 CELL INTEG 0 1 0 10 cell PID temperature control integral coefficient CO2 CELL DERIV 0 disabled 0 10 CO cell PID temperature control derivative coefficient CO2 STD CELL TEMP K 323 1 500 Standard cell temperature for temperature compensation CO2 STD CELL PRESS Hg 28 50 1 00 50 00 Standard CO cell pressure for pressure compensation O2 TARG SPAN1 96 20 95 0 1 100 Target O2 concentration during span calibration of
29. ON OFF 1 E Series only appears if Ethernet Option is installed Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON ACAL is a special configuration consult factory Set create unique gas ID number Figure A 6 Secondary Setup Menu HESSEN Submenu SET SET gt 02 co2 07275B DCN6418 A 7 Appendix Models T802 802 Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK COMM VARS SAMPLE SETUP MORE DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 818 PREV NEXT SIGNAL ANALOG ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIGURATION Press ENTR to start test PREV SET SET EDIT OQ EXT CAL MODE CAL 20 RELAY WATCHDOG 21 CO2CELL HEATER 25 CO2 SPAN VALVE nor used 26 VENT VALVE not used Appendix Table A4 NOTE Menu items and numbers change when there so Cazoptin installed 1 Only appears if one of the voltage ranges is selected 2 Manual adjustment menu only appears if either the Auto Cal feature is OFF or the range is set for CURRent 3 Only appears if the optional CO Sensor is installed Only appears if the optional concentration alarms are installed ACAL is a special configuration consult factory 1v AOUTS CALIBRATED 1st CAL SPAN CONC OUT 1 IBST CAL CONC OUT 2 CONC OUT 3 TEST OUTOUT AIN CALIBRATED 27 1043 INTERNAL ANALOG VOLTAGE SIGNALS RANGE OVER TEST CHANNEL OUPUT PRESSUR
30. PRIMARY SETUP MENU L DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE Y RANGE MODE MENU DIL ETUPXX O2FACTOR 1 0 Gain ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to select dilution ratio gain LY i factor for gas SETUP XX CO2DILFACTOR 1 0 Gain EXIT discards the new Default 1 e g 1 1 1 ENTR setting ENTR accepts the Toggle these buttons to select dilution new setting ratio gain factor for gas NOTE Only appears if the optional Sensor is installed a 5 Calibrate the analyzer e Make sure that the calibration span gas is either supplied through the same dilution system as the sample gas or has an appropriately lower actual concentration EXAMPLE If the reporting range limit is set for 100 and the dilution ratio of the sample gas is 20 either a span gas with the concentration of 100 can be used if the span gas passes through the same dilution steps as the sample gas or e a5 span gas must be used if the span gas IS NOT routed through the dilution system 5 5 SETUP gt PASS PASSWORD FEATURE The menu system provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent unauthorized adjustments When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS menu item the system will prompt the user for a password anytime a password protecte
31. See Section for configuration commands and their strict syntax Commands be pasted in from of an existing text file which was first edited offline and then uploaded through a specific transfer procedure IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Whereas the editing adding and deleting of DAS channels and parameters of one channel through the front panel control buttons can be done without affecting the other channels uploading a DAS configuration script to the analyzer through its communication ports will erase all data parameters and channels by replacing them with the new DAS configuration Backup of data and the original DAS configuration is advised before attempting any DAS changes 07275B DCN6418 159 8 REMOTE OPERATION This section provides information needed when using external digital and serial I O for remote operation It assumes that the electrical connections have been made as described in Section 3 3 1 Your analyzer can be remotely configured calibrated or queried for stored data through the serial ports via either Computer mode using a personal computer or Interactive mode using a terminal emulation program 8 1 COMPUTER MODE Computer Mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated interface program such as APICOM 8 1 1 REMOTE CONTROL VIA APICOM APICOM is an easy to use yet powerful interface program that allows the user to access and control any of Teledyne API s main line
32. Sensor Option Flow Control Assembly amp Critical Flow Orifice T802 Electronic Block Diagram CO Sensor Option PCA Layout and Electronic Connections CPU Card Relay PCA Layout Relay PCA with AC Relay Retainer in Place Status LED Locations Relay PCA Power Distribution Block Diagram Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram Basic Software Operatioi Triboelectric Charging Basic Anti ESD Workbench scccccccsscsessssseseseeseseseseeneseseseeesusneseseseensuessscsnsneneesiess 242 LIST OF TABLES Table 1 1 Table 2 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 4 1 Analyzer Options T802 Specifications Ventilation Clearance Display Screen and Touch Control Description Rear Panel Component Descriptions Analog Input Pin Assignments Analog Output Pin Outs Status Output Signals Control Input Signals NISTSRMs Available for Traceability of Calibration Gases Front Panel Display during System Warm iu Analyzer Operating Modes 1 07275B DCN6418 xiii Table of Contents Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Table 4 2 Table 6 4 Table 6 5 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Table 6 4 Table 6 5 Table 6 6
33. 0 10 VDC representing 0 22 concentration values Output A3 is only active if the CO sensor option is installed In this case a signal representing the currently measured CO concentration is output on this channel The output labeled A4 is special It can be set by the user See Section 5 9 6 to output several of the test functions accessible via the TST TST gt menu buttons 07275B DCN6418 71 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 4 3 REPORTING RANGE MODES The T802 provides three analog output range modes to choose from e Single range SNGL mode sets a single maximum range for the analog output If single range is selected both outputs are slaved together and will represent the same measurement span e g 0 20 however their electronic signal levels may be configured for different ranges e g 0 10 VDC vs 0 1 VDC e Dual range DUAL allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with different measurement spans as well as separate electronic signal levels e Auto range AUTO mode gives the analyzer the ability to output data via a low range and high range When this mode is selected the analyzer will automatically switch between the two ranges dynamically as the concentration value fluctuates Range status is also output via the external digital I O status outputs See Section 3 3 1 5 To select the Analog Output Range Type press O2 RNG
34. 1 Power Supply Triple 058021100 38V PS0000037 Ji ASV Relay Board 045230100 P8 Power Supply PS0000087 1 12 Relay Board 045230100 P8 Power Supply Single PS0000088 1 Ji 3 HEJ Relay Board 045230100 PB Power Supply Single 7650000038 Ji 1 046710000 CBL MOTHERBOARD TO XMITTER BD MULTIDROP OPTION GND Motherboard 058021100 Xmitter bd w Multidrop 069500000 2 ES Motherboard 1058021100 Xmitter bd w Multidrop 069500000 147 RTSO Motherboard 058021100 Xmitter bd wiMuitidrop 069500000 18 TXO Motherboard 058021100 Xmitter bd w Multidrop 069500000 12 RS GNDO RTS1 Motherboard Motherboard 1058021100 1058021100 Pig Pid 10 Xmitter bd w Multidrop 8 Xmitter bd w Multidro 069500000 p 069500000 RXi Motherboard 1058021100 ELEN Motherboard 056021100 Bi2 9 Xmitter bd w Multidro 7 Xmitter bd w Multidror 069500000 p 069500000 RXi Motherboard 1058021100 Xmitter bd wiMuitidrop 1069500000 1 485 Motherboard 058021100 P12 Xmitter bd w Multidrop 069500000 7 RS GNDT Motherboard 058021100 P12 Xmitter bd w Muitidrop 1069500000 5 CBL CO2 02 SENSOR THERWHTR Relay Board 1045230100 102 sensor therm htr 043420000 Relay Board 045230100 O2 sensor the
35. RS232 or RS485 i Concentration Alarm Relay Figure 3 4 Rear Panel Layout 07275B DCN6418 29 Section Il Operating Instructions Table 3 3 Rear Panel Component Descriptions Component Function cooling fan Pulls ambient air into chassis through side vents and exhausts through rear AC power connector Connector for three prong cord to apply AC power to the analyzer CAUTION The cord s power specifications specs MUST comply with the power specs on the analyzer s rear panel Model number Volt Freq information label Model specs label Identifies the analyzer model number and provides power specs SAMPLE Inlet connection to be used for any one of the following Sample gas Span gas Calibration gas Zero air EXHAUST Connect an exhaust gas line of not more than 10 meters long here that leads outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument SPAN 1 Not used SPAN2 VENT Not used ZERO AIR Not used RX TX LEDs indicate receive RX and transmit TX activity on the when blinking COM 2 Serial communications port for RS 232 or RS 485 RS 232 Serial communications port for RS 232 only DCE DTE Switch to select either data terminal equipment or data communication equipment during RS 232 communication STATUS For outputs to devices such as Programmable Logic Controllers PLCs ANALOG OUT For vol
36. Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 8 2 Table 9 1 Table 9 2 Table 10 1 Table 10 2 Table 10 3 Table 11 1 Table 11 2 Table 11 3 Table 11 4 Table 11 5 Table 11 6 Table 11 7 Table 11 8 Table 12 1 Table 13 1 Table 13 2 Test Functions Defined Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions Secondary Setup Mode Features and Function Variable Names VARS Diagnostic Mode DIAG Functions DIAG Analog I O Functions Analog Output Voltage Range Min Max Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration Current Loop Output Check Test Channels Functions available on the T802 s Analog Outpu 105 Concentration Alarm Default Settings COM Port Communication Modes Ethernet Status Indicators LAN Internet Configuration Propertie RS 232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol Teledyne API Hessen Protocol Response Modes Default Hessen Status Flag Assignments Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS DAS Data Channel Properties DAS Data Parameter Functions Teledyne API Serial Command Types NISTSRM s Available for Traceability of O2 Calibration Gases Calibration Data Quality Evaluation T802 Maintenance Schedule T802 Test Function Record Predictive uses for Test Functions Warning Messages Indicated Failures Test Functions Indicated Failures Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indication Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications DC Power Test Point and Wiring Col
37. X ID COMMAND lt CR gt Where is the command type one letter refer to Table 8 2 that defines the type of command Allowed designators are listed in Appendix A 6 ID is the machine identification number Section 5 7 1 Example the Command 700 followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 700 COMMAND is the command designator This string is the name of the command being issued LIST ABORT NAME EXIT etc Some commands may have additional arguments that define how the command is to 07275B DCN6418 161 Remote Operation Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual be executed Press lt gt or refer to Appendix A 6 for a list of available command designators CR is a carriage return All commands must be terminated by a carriage return usually achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer Table 8 2 Teledyne API Serial I O Command Types COMMAND COMMAND TYPE Calibration Diagnostic Logon Test measurement Variable lt Warning 8 2 1 3 DATA TYPES Data types consist of integers hexadecimal integers floating point numbers Boolean expressions and text strings Integer data Used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records a filter length etc e They consist of an optional plus or
38. to scroll to the first lt SET S T gt CAL EXIT channel Continue pressing SET gt to view each of 8 channels gt DIAG AIO XIN1 1 00 0 00 V OFF Press EDIT at any channel lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT to to change Gain Offset Units and whether to display gt the channel in the Test i functions OFF ON DIAG AIO GAIN 1 00V V SET EDIT EXIT DIAGAIO XIN1OFFSET 0 00V DIAG XIN1 GAIN 1 00V V SET SET EDIT EXIT 0 0 1 0 0 ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO XIN1 UNITS V Press to change SET SET EDIT EXIT Gain value DIAG AIO XIN1DISPLAY OFF Pressing ENTR records the new setling and returns to the previous menu Pressing EXIT ignores the new setling and SET EDIT EXIT returns to the previous menu 108 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 10 SETUP gt MORE gt ALRM USING THE GAS CONCENTRATION ALARMS OPTION 61 The T802 includes two concentration alarms Each alarm has a user settable limit and is associated with an opto isolated TTL relay accessible via the status output connector on the instrument s back panel See Section 3 3 1 5 If the O2 concentration measured by the instrument rises above that limit the alarm s status output relay is closed The default settings for ALMI and ALMA are Table 5 9 Concentration Alarm Default Settings
39. 11 Chassis fan 040010000 127 Relay Board 048230100 Pii Chassis fan 040010000 PiFlow Sensor 15V Relay Board 048230100 PiFlow Sensor board 040030100 P Flow Sensor board 040030100 Motherboard 058021100 Pressure signal 1 Pressure signal 2 B Flow Sensor board 040030100 OP000008 Pi Motherboard Motherboard 058021100 058021100 Coz ATX ATXY Sensor 06737 CBL 12C to AUX I O ANALOG IN OPTION Motherboard Motherboard OP0000033 058021100 058021100 Pi J106 7106 O Motherboard 1 Auxl O PCA 2_ Aux OPCA 058021100 067300000 067300000 06738 CBL CPU COM to AUX I O jotherboar Ux Motherboard 058021100 J106 4 Aux iO PCA 067300000 Motherboard 058021100 106 5 Aux I O PCA 067300000 TEDOF Motherboard 058021100 Ji06 6 Aux O PCA 067300000 06741 CPU USB TO FRONT PANEL MULTIDROP OPTION RXD CPU PCA 067240000 COMi Xmitter bd w Multidrop 069500000 33 1 DCD CPU PCA 067240000 2 Xmitter bd w Multidrop 1069500000 J3 2 DTR CPU 067240000 COMI 3 Xmitter bd w Multidrop 069500000 J3 3 DSR CPU PCA 067240000 COM1 5 Xmitter bd w Multidrop 069500000 J3 5 GND CPU PCA 067240000 6 Xmitter bd w Multidrop 069500000 J3 6 CTS CPU 067240000 COMi
40. 29 94 Triggers zero calibration of range 2 on enters cal off exits cal 23 54 Triggers Oe span calibration of range 2 on enters cal off exits cal 24 3 Triggers CO zero calibration of range 1 on enters cal off exits cal 253 Triggers span calibration of range 1 on enters cal off exits cal 265 Triggers zero calibration of range 2 on enters cal off exits cal 2759 Triggers span calibration of range 2 on enters cal off exits cal T Series E Series 801 803 or 802 with CO option future 3 Set DYN ZERO or DYN SPAN variables to ON to enable calculating new slope or offset Otherwise a calibration check is performed 802 or 803 5 T Series E Series 801 or 803 5 T Series E Series 802 only 7 T Series External analog input option A 32 07275B DCN6418 APPENDIX Spare Parts Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by Teledyne Advanced Note Pollution Instrumentation TAPI may result in non compliance with European standard EN 61010 1 Due to the dynamic nature of part numbers please refer to the TAPI Website at Note http www teledyne api com or call Customer Service at 800 324 5190 for more recent updates to part numbers 07275B DCN6418 B 1 2 This page intentionally left blank 07275B DCN6418 T80X Spare Parts List Ref 072690000A DCN6431 2012 April 12 PARTNUMBER DESCRIPTION 000940700 CD ORIFICE 005 YE
41. 4 CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day EDIT ENTR EXIT Enter sign and number of seconds per day the clock gains or loses SETUP XX 8 CLOCK ADJUST 0 Sec Day EXIT discards the new setting PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 82 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 7 SETUP gt MORE gt COMM COMMUNICATION PORTS This section introduces the communications setup menu Section 6 provides the setup instructions and operation information To arrive at the communications menu press SETUP gt MORE gt COMM 5 7 1 ID MACHINE IDENTIFICATION Each type of Teledyne API s analyzer is configured with a default ID code The default ID code for the T802 analyzers is typically 802 but could also be 0 The ID number is only important if more than one analyzer is connected to the same communications channel such as when several analyzers are e onthe same Ethernet LAN Section 6 5 1 e inan RS 232 multidrop chain Section 3 3 1 8 e when applying MODBUS protocol Section 6 5 1 e when applying HESSEN protocol Section 6 5 2 If two analyzers of the same model type are used on one channel the ID codes of one or both of the instruments needs to be changed 07275B DCN6418 83 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne
42. 7 Xmitter bd w Multidrop 1069500000 J3 7 ATS CPUPCA 067240000 COMI 8 Xmitter bd w Mullidrop 069500000 35 8 Ri CPU PC 067240000 10 Xmitter bd w Mullidrop 1069500000 10 06738 CPU COM to AUX I O USB OPTION RXD CPU PCA 067240000 1 1 Aux I O PCA 0673000 or 02 J8 1 DCD CPU PCA 067240000 COMi 2 Aux I O PCA 06730000r 02 J8 2 DTR CPU PCA 067240000 COMI 3 Aux O 06730000r 02 3 3 TXD 067240000 COM 4 Aux I O PCA 0673000 or 02 J8 4 DSR GPU PCA 067240000 COM1 5 Aux I O 0673000 or 02 J3 5 GND CPU PCA 067240000_ 1_6 Auxl O PCA 0673000 or 02 J8 6 CTS CPU 067240000 7 Aux 06730000r 02 J8 T RIS CPU PCA 067240000 8 Aux I O 06730000r 02 J8 8 Ri CPU PCA 067240000 COMI 10 Aux PCA 0673000 or 02 3 10 06739 CPU ETHERNET TO AUX I O CPU PCA 067240000 LAN 1 Aux I O PCA 06730XXXX J2 1 CPU 067240000 _2 Aux I O PCA 067300000 J2 2 LEDO CPU PCA 067240000 3 Aux IO 067300000 J2 3 ARKE CPU PCA 067240000 LAN 4 Aux IO 06730 JZ D ARK CPU PCA 067240000 5 Aux I O 06730000 02 5 LEDT CPU PCA 067240000 6 Aux iO PCA 06730XXXX 6 LEDI CPU PCA 067240000 LAN _7_ Aux I O PCA 06730XXXX J2 7 CPU PC 067240000 LAN 8 Aux iO 06730XXXX 0 8 07482 HDMI T SERIES CPU PCA CPU PCA LCD Interface 067240000
43. ALARM STATUS LIMIT SET POINT O2 ALARM1 Disabled 10 00 96 O2 ALARM2 Disabled 30 0 CO2 ALARM1 Disabled 5 000 CO2 ALARM2 Disabled 10 00 Only available if the optional CO2 sensor is installed To prevent the concentration alarms from activating during span calibration operations make sure to press CAL button prior to introducing span gas into the analyzer Note 07275B DCN6418 109 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 10 1 SETTING THE T802 OPTION 61 CONCENTRATION ALARM LIMITS To enable either of the O concentration alarms and set the Limit points press the alarm point SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXXXK T 5 gt CA SETUP SETUP XX PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS PASS CLK MORE EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until the desired Alarm is selected SETUPXX SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT SETUP XX OZALRM 2 DISABLED PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X O2ALRM 2 OFF ON ENTR EXIT Toggle to t enable disabie the alarm DIAG FCAL O2 ALARM 2 30 00 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to set EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 110 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O
44. Continue pressing SET gt until you reach the output to be configured DISPLAYED AS CONC OUT 1 CONC OUT 2 CONC OUT 3 TEST OUTPUT CHANNEL A1 nunun A2 Sensor Only m A DIAGAIO CONC_OUT_2 5V OVR NOCAL lt SET SET gt EDIT EXIT LA DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE CURR SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET gt until DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED NO lt SET SET gt CAL ExiT PES Analyzer automatically AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 2 calibrates the DCV signal du output from the analog output channel to the VDCHto mA converter DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CURR Z 0 mV 0100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 0100 ENTREXITI These buttons increase decrease the analog output These menus signal level not the value on the adjust the mA display y signal output by by 100 10 or 1 counts DIAG CONC OUT 2 CURR S 5000 mV converter circuit Contine adjustments until the U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT current signal measured at the output of the analyzer matches the zero and span points of the intended current range e g 20 mA 4 20 mA 7 DIAGAIO OUT 2 CALIBRATED YES SET SET CAL EXIT An alternative method for measuring the output of the Current Loop converter is to connect 250 ohm 1 resistor across the current loop
45. NEXT OFF Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to scroll through the available modes COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL OFF Activate Deactivate NEXT OFF the displayed mode by toggling the ON OFF button EXIT COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL ON ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting PREV NEXT ON ENTR accepts the new setting J gt Press PREV and NEXT to continue selecting other COM modes you want to enable or disable using the ON or OFF button The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 07275B DCN6418 115 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 6 2 2 COM PORT BAUD RATE To sel ect the baud rate of either of the Ports to go SETUP gt MORE gt COMM and select either COMI or as follows SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS PASS CLK MORE EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X COMM VARS DIAG EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID 2 SETUP M MODE O SET EDIT EXIT COM BAUD RATE 115200 SET EDIT EXIT Toggle these buttons to cycle through the available Baud rates 300 1200 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 COM1 BAUD RATE 115200 PREV NEXT EXIT COM BAUD RATE 19200 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the ne
46. a number with 1 to 4 digits MESSAGE is the message content that may contain warning messages test measurements variable values etc lt CRLF gt is a carriage return line feed pair which terminates the message The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse them into an easy structure Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any information on the time a message was issued hence it is useful to log such messages for trouble shooting and reference purposes Terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review 07275B DCN6418 163 Remote Operation Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual 8 3 REMOTE ACCESS BY MODEM The T802 can be connected to a modem for remote access This requires a cable between the analyzer s COM port and the modem typically a DB 9F to DB 25M cable available from Teledyne API with PN WR0000024 Once the cable has been connected check to make sure The DTE DCE switch on the rear panel is the DCE position The T802 COM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem The Modem is designed to operate with an 8 bit word length with one stop bit The MODEM ENABLE communication mode is turned on Mode 64 see Section 6 2 1 Once this is completed the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the analyzer
47. complete 180 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual Calibration Procedures The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 9 5 4 CO ZERO SPAN CALIBRATION To perform tl e zero span calibration procedure SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 gt L 02 XXX XX SETUP Toggle TST gt button until O2 XXXXX ETUP Allow zero gas to en at the rear of the analyzer ter the SAMPLE port E CO2 STB X XX CAL SETUP Press CO2 then GAS TO CAL 02 ENTREXIT ENTR to initiate zero point calibration of the sensor TST ZERO CONC AL 2 MP CO2 STB XXX ST TST gt ENTR Set the Display to show the CO2 STB test function This function calculates the stability of the CO2 measurement Wait until CO2 STB falis below0 05 This may take several minutes Press ENTR to change the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the measurement Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu at the rear of the analyzer Allow span gas to enter the SAMPLE port Wait until CO2 STB falls below 0 05 This may take several minutes
48. penis CPU D2 D4 SPARE 05 Yellow CO Sensor Cell heater Heating Not Heating D6 Yellow Oz Sensor heater Heating Not Heating 07 09 010 011 16 SPARE Only active when the optional CO sensor is installed Not Used 11 3 GAS FLOW PROBLEMS When troubleshooting flow problems it is a good idea to first confirm that the actual flow and not the analyzer s flow sensor and software are in error or the flow meter is in error Use an independent flow meter to perform a flow check as described in Section 10 3 4 If this test shows the flow to be correct check the pressure sensors as described in Section 11 6 8 07275B DCN6418 203 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 11 3 1 T802 INTERNAL GAS FLOW DIAGRAMS In general flow problems can be divided into three categories e Flow is too high e Flow is greater than zero but is too low and or unstable Flowis zero no flow When troubleshooting flow problems it is crucial to confirm the actual flow rate without relying on the analyzer s flow display The use of an independent external flow meter to perform a flow check as described in Section 10 3 4 is essential The flow diagrams found in a variety of locations within this manual depicting the T802 in its standard configuration and with options installed can help in trouble shooting flow problems For your
49. 067240000 066970000 USB J15 2 LCD interface Transmitter 066970000 066970000 068810000 39 J1 07275B DCN6418 REVISIONS DESCRIPTION DATE PROTOTYPE RELEASE 2 12 11 Analog Status 85 485 INITIAL RELEASE 4 2 12 11020 Qut 11017 11010 amp 1011 Motherboard CN 058021100 DOM CP34 AC POWER ENTRANCE AUX 06730 Therm 036490100 715 1107 04342 33 CO2 Sensor ANALOG IN OPT pi Heater AC POWER 06760 __ 04040 SWITCH P30 2 Sensor P1 Therm Htr 0400301 04342 PS1 5 15 Fan n ski PS37 RELAY BOARD 0452301 PS2 12 ski PS38 ni n JPS 1 7 TC Prog Plug Pump Config Plug 120 04976XXXX 04289XXXX LCD Interface 32 LCD w Touchscreen Int Pump 06697 06790 0424105 Printed Documents are Uncontrolled KEY The Warman hereon ine propery or UNLESS OMERWISE SP DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES 2 TELEDYNE 1 All part numbers in falic identify confidence for reference ony ANGULAR Advanced Pollution Instrumentation Unauthorized use by anyone for any PELA A Teledyne Technologies Company cables that are refered to in the other purposesis prohited this X OT0 025 THLE accompanying document 073800
50. 1 select CURR from the list of options on the Output Range menu Adjustment of the signal zero and span levels of the current loop output is done by raising or lowering the voltage output of the D to A converter circuitry on the analyzer s motherboard This raises or lowers the signal level produced by the current loop option circuitry The software allows this adjustment to be made in 100 10 or 1 count increments Since the exact amount by which the current signal is changed per D to A count varies from output to output and instrument to instrument you will need to measure the change in the signal levels with a separate current meter placed in series with the output circuit See Figure 3 7 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output connector Current Meter I OUT IN Recording Device ANALYZER Figure 5 3 Setup for Checking Calibration Current Output Signal Levels Using an Ammeter CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Do not exceed 60 V peak voltage between current loop outputs and instrument ground 100 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual To adjust the zero and span signal levels of the current outputs select the ANALOG CONFIGURATION submenu see Section 5 9 3 then press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU IDIAG ANALOG VO CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL EXIT
51. 100 00 O2 XXX XX SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT ISETUP RANGE CONTROL MENU ETUP X X MODE SET RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SE gt MODEDAU RNGE gt MODE gt SNGL See section for RNGE MODEPAUTO RNGE gt MODE gt DUAL Upper span limit setting for the individual range modes are shared Resetting the span limit in one mode also resets the span limit for the corresponding range in the other modes as follows SNGL DUAL AUTO Range lt gt Rangel gt Low Range Range2 lt gt High Range SETUP X X 72 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 4 3 1 RNGE gt MODE gt SNGL CONFIGURING THE T802 ANALYZER FOR SINGLE RANGE MODE Single Range Mode SNGL is the default reporting range mode for the analyzer When the single range mode is selected SNGL all analog O concentration outputs A1 and A2 are slaved together and set to the same reporting range limits e g 0 22 00 The span limit of this reporting range can be set to any value within the physical range of the analyzer Although both outputs share the same concentration reporting range the electronic signal ranges of the analog outputs may still be configured for different values e g 0 5 VDC 0 10 VDC etc see Section 5 9 3 1 To select SNGL range mode and to set the upper limit of
52. 100 Sample pressure set point for Warnings pressure compensation and warning limits 15 35 BOX SET 30 5 60 Box temperature warning limits Warnings Set point is not used 8 50 RS232 MODE BitFlag 0 0 65535 RS 232 1 mode flags Add values to combine flags 1 quiet mode 2 computer mode 4 enable security 8 enable hardware handshaking 16 enable Hessen protocol 32 enable multi drop 64 enable modem 128 ignore RS 232 line errors 256 disable XON support 512 disable hardware FIFOs 1024 enable RS 485 mode 2048 even parity 7 data bits 1 stop bit 4096 enable command prompt 8192 even parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit 16384 enable dedicated MODBUS ASCII protocol 32678 enable dedicated MODBUS RTU or TCP protocol BAUD RATE 115200 300 RS 232 COM1 baud rate 1200 Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 2400 interface 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 A 12 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Range Description Units Value MODEM INIT AT YO amp DO Any character RS 232 COM1 modem amp HO amp 10 SO 2 in the allowed initialization string Sent verbatim amp BO amp N6 amp MO character set plus carriage return to modem on E0 Q1 amp Wo Up to 100 power up or manually Enclose characters value in double quote
53. 7 Control Input Signals Input Status Definition ON Condition The analyzer is placed in Calibration mode The mode field of the display GAC MODE will read O2 CAL R or O2 CAL ZR The analyzer is placed in span calibration mode as part of performing a low B REMOTE SPAN CAL span midpoint calibration The mode field of the display will read O2 CAL SR If not active it will be in ZERO MODE C RANGE2 CAL The analyzer is placed in span calibration mode as part of performing a High Span calibration D CO2 CAL ONLY available if the optional is installed Initiates calibration of the CO sensor CO2 CAL R or CO2 CAL ZR E amp F SPARE The ground level from the analyzer s internal DC power supplies same as V Digital Ground chassis ground U External Power input Input pin for 5 VDC required to activate Pins A F Internally generated 5V DC power To activate inputs A F place a jumper 5 VDC output between this pin and the U pin The maximum amperage through this port is 300 mA combined with the analog output supply if used 3 3 1 7 CONCENTRATION ALARM RELAY OPTION 61 The Teledyne API T Series analyzers have an option for four 4 dry contact relays on the rear panel of the instrument This relay option is different from and in addition to the Contact Closures that come standard on all TAPI instruments The relays have three pins that have connections on the rear pa
54. ANALOG OUTPUT REPORTING RANGE CONFIGURATION 5 4 1 PHYSICAL RANGE VERSUS ANALOG OUTPUT REPORTING RANGES Functionally the T802 analyzers have one hardware PHYSICAL RANGE that is capable of determining O2 concentrations from 0 00 to 100 00 This architecture improves reliability and accuracy by avoiding the need for extra switchable gain amplification circuitry Once properly calibrated the analyzer s front panel will accurately report concentrations along the entire span of its physical range Because many applications use only a small part of the analyzer s full physical range data resolution problems can occur for most analog recording devices For example in a typical application where a T802 is being used to measure atmospheric concentration the full scale of expected values is only 21 of the instrument s full measurement range Unmodified the corresponding output signal would also be recorded across only 21 of the range of the recording device The T802 analyzers solve this problem by allowing the user to select a scaled reporting range for the analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical range relevant to the specific application Only this REPORTING RANGE of the analog outputs is scaled the physical range of the analyzer and the readings displayed on the front panel remain unaltered Note Both the DAS values stored in the CPU s memory and the concentration values reported on the front panel are u
55. AND INDIVIDUAL RECORDS DAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following keystroke sequence SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 02 XXX XX i DAS VIEW Menu Button Functions Button FUNCTION PV10 Moves the VIEW backward 10 records SETUP UP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU PREV Moves the VIEW backward 1 record or channel ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT NEXT Moves the VIEW forward 1 record or channel NX10 Moves the VIEW forward 10 records UP X X DATA ACQUISITION PRM Selects the previous parameter on the list VIEW EDIT EXIT gt Selects the next parameter the list Buttons only appear when when applicable UP X X CONC DATA AVAILABLE NEXT VIEW EXIT TUP X X 101 21 00 CONC1 20 99 PV10 PREV NX10 NEXT lt PRM PRM gt ETUP X X 101 22 00 CONC1 20 97 SETUP 102 04 55 STABIL 00 02 PV10 PREV NX10 NEXT lt PRM PRM PV10 PREV NX10 NEXT lt PRM PRM gt Continue pressing NEXT to view remaining DAS channels The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 07275B DCN6418 143 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 7 1 4 SETUP DAS EDIT ACCESSING THE DAS EDIT MODE DAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote control program The following list of ke
56. DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT decrease the analog output signal level not the value on the display by 100 10 or 1 counts Continue adjustments until the voltage measured at the output DIAG AIO U100 UP10 CONC OUT 2 VOLT S 4500 mV UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTREXIT of the analyzer and or the input of the recording device matches Zero or span voltage within the tolerances listed in Table 8 7 DIAG AIO CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED YES EXIT CAL These menus only appear if AUTO CAL is turned OFF 07275B DCN6418 99 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 3 7 MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF CURRENT LOOP OPTION OUTPUT SPAN AND OFFSET A current loop option may be purchased for the A1 A2 and A3 analog outputs of the analyzer This option places circuitry in series with the output of the A to D converter on the motherboard that changes the normal DC voltage output to a 0 20 milliamp signal See Section 3 3 1 4 e outputs can be ordered scaled to any set of limits within that 0 20 mA range however most current loop applications call for either 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA range spans All current loop outputs have 5 over range Ranges whose lower limit is set above 1 mA also have a 5 under range To switch an analog output from voltage to current loop follow the instructions in Section 5 9 3
57. DYN SPAN Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to turned on CANNOT DYN ZERO Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to turned on CO2 ALRM1 WARNING Concentration alarm 1 is enabled and the measured CO level is 2 the set point CO2 ALRM2 WARNING Concentration alarm 2 is enabled and the measured CO level is 2 the set point CO2 CELL TEMP WARN CO sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased DATA INITIALIZED DAS data storage was erased 02 ALRM1 WARNING Concentration alarm 1 is enabled and the measured Oz level is gt the set point 02 ALRM2 WARNING Concentration alarm 2 is enabled and the measured O level is 2 the set point O2 CELL TEMP WARN O sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits REAR BOARD NOT DET The CPU is unable to communicate with the motherboard RELAY BOARD WARN The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board SAMPLE FLOW WARN The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits SAMPLE PRESS WARN Sample gas pressure outside of operational parameters SYSTEM RESET The analyzer was rebooted or the CPU was reset 1 Only enabled when the optional CO Sensor is installed Alarm warnings only present when optional concentratio
58. MEASUREMENT The type of paramagnetic sensor used in the T802 analyzer is called a magneto mechanical sensor This type of sensor consists of a small dumbbell shaped body a sphere on either end made of glass and filled with a gas of negative paramagnetic characteristic in this case The dumbbell body is suspended on a platinum fiber within the magnetic field of a permanent magnet in such a way that it is free to rotate Because the inside the spheres has a small opposite magnetic charge from the field of the permanent magnet the dumbbell s resting neutral position is slightly deflected away from the strong point of the field 07275B DCN6418 219 Principles of Operation Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Light Source Qs CIN Figure 12 1 Paramagnetic Sensor Design When sample gas containing oxygen flows into the magneto mechanical sensor the O molecules are drawn toward the strong point of the magnetic field This causes the filled spheres to deflect even more so that the suspended dumbbell body pivots on the platinum wire The more O present the further the dumbbell body is deflected from its neutral position The position of the dumbbell is detected by a pair of photocells that receive a light beam reflected from a mirror attached to the center of the dumbbell body As the dumbbell body pivots the angle of the reflected light beam on the photocells changes The r
59. O2 RANGE The concentration range for this entry in the gas list This feature permits the user to select which concentration range will be used for this gas list entry The T802 analyzer has two ranges RANGE1 or LOW and RANGE2 or HIGH See Section 5 4 1 0 The HESSEN protocol to use whatever range is currently active 1 The HESSEN protocol will always use RANGE1 for this gas list entry 2 The HESSEN protocol will always use RANGE2 for this gas list entry 3 Not applicable to the T802 analyzer GAS ID identification number assigned to a specific gas In the case of the T802 analyzer in its base configuration there is only one gas and its default GAS ID is 110 This ID number should not be modified REPORT States whether this list entry is to be reported or not reported when ever this gas type or instrument is polled by the HESSEN network If the list entry is not to be reported this field will be blank The T802 analyzer is a single gas instrument that measures Thus the default gas list entry would be O2 0 110 REPORTED No default gas list entry exists for CO If the optional CO senor is installed the following gas list entry should be added CO2 0 111 REPORTED These default settings cause the instrument to report the concentration value of the currently active range If you wish to have just concentration values stored for a specific range this list entry should be edited or add
60. O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Verify change these settings by pressing 3 4 3 1 REPORTING RANGE SETTINGS SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET DIL EXIT SETUP RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET DIL EXIT SETUP XX 02 RANGE 100 00 1 0 o ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons for changing the value to set the output reporting rangg 77Z SETUP XX 02 20 95 0 2 0 9 5 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting 77 07275B DCN6418 57 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 3 4 3 2 DILUTION RATIO OPTION SET UP If the dilution ratio option is enabled on your T802 and your application involves diluting the sample gas before it enters the analyzer set the dilution ratio as follows SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX lt TST TST CAL SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT RANGE CONTROL MENU DIL Toggle these buttons to set the dilution factor SETUP X X O2 DIL FACTOR 1 0 Gai This is the number by em which the analyzer will 44 0 0 0 1 0 ENTR EXIT multiply the concentration of the gas passing th
61. Operation Manual Table 4 2 Test Functions Defined PARAMETER DISPLAY TITLE UNITS MEANING RANGE The full scale limit at which the reporting range of the analyzer is Range RANGE1 96 currently set THIS IS NOT the Physical Range of the instrument RANGE2 See Section 5 4 1 for more information CO Range CO2 RANGE 926 The range setting for the optional CO2 Sensor Standard deviation of O2 concentration readings Data points are a recorded every ten seconds using the last 25 data points This Stability STABIL function can be reset to show or CO stability in instruments with those sensor options installed The absolute pressure of the Sample gas as measured by a Sample Pressure PRES In Hg A pressure sensor located inside the sample chamber Ape Sample mass flow rate as measured by the flow rate sensor in the Sample Flow SAMPLE FL cm min sample gas stream E O2 SLOPE Os slope computed during zero span calibration O Sensor Offset 02 OFFSET offset computed during zero span calibration Box Temperature BOX TEMP C The temperature inside the analyzer chassis O Cell O2 CELL TEMP The current temperature of the O2 sensor measurement cell Temperature CO Cell CO2 CELL Temperature TEMP C The current temperature of the CO2 sensor measurement cell CO2 SLOPE CO slope computed during zero span calibration 2 OFFSET CO offset computed during zero span
62. Operation Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge GLOSSARY Note Some terms in this glossary may not occur elsewhere in this manual Term Description Definition 10BaseT an Ethernet standard that uses twisted T pairs of copper wires to transmit at 10 megabits per second Mbps 100BaseT same as 10BaseT except ten times faster 100 Mbps APICOM name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne API to its customers ASSY Assembly CAS Code Activated Switch CE Converter Efficiency the percentage of light energy that is actually converted into electricity CEM Continuous Emission Monitoring Chemical formulas that may be included in this document CO carbon dioxide methane H20 water vapor HC general abbreviation for hydrocarbon HNO3 nitric acid H2S hydrogen sulfide NO nitric oxide NO2 nitrogen dioxide NOx nitrogen oxides here defined as the sum of NO and NO2 nitrogen oxides often called odd nitrogen the sum of NOx plus other compounds such HNO definitions vary widely and may include nitrate NO3 PAN N2O and other compounds as well NH3 ammonia molecular oxygen Os ozone 02 sulfur dioxide cm metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter replaces the obsolete abbreviation CPU Central Processing Unit 07275B DCN6418 247 A Primer Electro Static Discharge
63. PS2 12 650000038 3 PSi 45 15 0000037 Power Gnd PS2 12 PS0000088 SK2 2 PST 45 15 250000037 2 AC Line Switched PS1 5 15 PS0000037 Relay Board 045230100 1 038290000 Power PST 5 15 250000037 SK CBL ASSY DC POWER TO MOTHERBOARD Relay Board 048230100 DGND Relay Board 045230100 J7 1 Motherboard 058021100 J15 1 48V Relay Board 045230100 7 2 Motherboard 058021100 Jis 2 AGND Relay Board 045230100___J7__ 3 Motherboard 058021100 J15 3 18V 048230100 J7 4 Motherboard 058021 100 4 AGND Relay Board 045230100 J7 5 Motherboard 058021100 5 6 ASV Relay Board 045230100 J7 6 Motherboard 058021100 12 Serial Data Motherboard 058021100 P107 5 Relay Board 12V Relay Board 045230100 J7 8 Motherboard 058021100 5 8 Chassis Gnd Relay Board 048230100 J7 10 Motherboard 058021100 J5 9 040230000 CBL I2C RELAY BOARD TO MOTHERBOARD 12 Serial Clock Motherboard 058021100 107 3 Relay Board 045230100 1 045230100 CBL INTERFACE BOARD TO MOTHERBOARD Kbd Interupt LCD Interface ___ 066970000 J2 7 Motherboard 058021100 DGND LCD interface 066970000 J2 2 Motherboard SCL 066970000 J2 6 Motherboard Shid LCD interface 06697000042 i0 Motherboard CBL DC POWER TO RELAY BOARD DGND Relay Board 045230100
64. PU20 amp 04241 KB 07275B DCN6418 B 5 6 This page intentionally left blank 07275B DCN6418 Warranty Repair Questionnaire T80X M80XE 06532C DCN 5798 jw TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION A Teledyne Technologies Company CUSTOMER PHONE CONTACT NAME FAX NO SITE ADDRESS MODEL TYPE SERIAL NO FIRMWARE REVISION Are there any failure messages Continue on back if necessary PLEASE COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING TABLE PARAMETER RECORDED VALUE ACCEPTABLE VALUE 02 RANGE 0 100 02 CELL TEMP 50 5 02 SLOPE 10503 02 OFFSET 10 to 10 CO2 RANGE 0 to 20 CO2 CELL TEMP 50 5 2 SLOPE 10 03 2 OFFSET 10 to 10 STABIL lt 0 2 with zero air PRESS in Hg A ambient 1 SAMPLE FLOW cm Imin 120 20 BOX TEMP ambient 5 following values are under the signal i o submenu REF 4096 MV mV 4096mV 2 mV and Must be Stable REF GND mV 0 0 5 and Must be Stable Not all models are equipped with both and a CO sensor Cap the SAMPLE inlet and record the flow rate and pressure readings What is PRESS What is the SAMPLE FLOW What are the failure symptoms in Hg A cc min What test have you done trying to solve the problem TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE EMAIL api customerservice teledyne com PHONE
65. Sample Mode after completing the boot up sequence and start monitoring O gas However there is a warm up period of about 60 minutes before reliable gas measurements can be taken During the warm up period the front panel display may behave as described in Table 3 9 Table 3 9 Front Panel Display during System Warm Up FIELD COLOR BEHAVIOR SIGNIFICANCE Conc N A Displays current This is normal operation but deemed inaccurate during the Concentration compensated H2S warm up period concentration Mode N A Displays blinking Instrument is in sample mode but is still in the process of SAMPLE warming up Param Displays menus N A parameters and Use any warning messages as a means of diagnosing problems Parameters messages STATUS LEDS Sample Green On Unit is operating in sample mode front panel display is being updated Cal Yellow Off The instrument s calibration is not enabled Fault Red Blinking The analyzer is warming up and hence out of specification for a fault free reading various warning messages appear in the Param field 52 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 3 4 1 1 WARNING MESSAGES Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside the specified limits during the analyzer s warm up period the software will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power up If warning messages persist after the 60 min
66. T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual To edit the instrument s ID code press RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX SETUP SAMPLE SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS PASS CLK MORE EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP X X COMM VARS DIAG COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET 1 COM2 MACHINE 10 802 ID 0 EXIT discards the new setting 2 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to cycle through the ENTR accepts the available character new setting J gt set 0 7 The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory The ID can also be used for to identify any one of several analyzers attached to the same network but situated in different physical locations e g by location number company asset number etc 5 7 2 INET ETHERNET Use gt gt to configure Ethernet communications whether manually or via DHCP Please see Section 6 3 for configuration details 84 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 7 3 COM1 COM2 MODE BAUDE RATE AND TEST PORT Use the SETUP gt COMM gt COM1 COM2 menus to e configure communication modes Section 6 2 1 e view set the baud rate Section 6 2 2 e test the connections of the com ports Section 6 2 3 Configuring COMI or requires setting the DCE DTE switch on the rear panel Section 6 1 provides DCE D
67. XIN5 AIN5 37 15 EU External analog input 5 value in engineering units XIN6 AIN6 37 15 EU External analog input 6 value in engineering units XIN7 AIN7 37 15 EU External analog input 7 value in engineering units XIN8 AIN8 37 15 EU External analog input 8 value in engineering units 18 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802 Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A Name Message Text Description Test Measurements CLOCKTIME TIME 10 38 27 Current instrument time of day clock The name is used to request a message via the RS 232 interface as in T BOXTEMP T Series E Series 801 803 or 802 with option T Series E Series 802 or 803 T Series E Series 801 or 803 5 T Series E Series 802 only T Series E Series 803 only 7 T Series E Series 802 with CO option T Series E Series 801 or 802 without option 10 External analog input option 072758 DCN6418 A 19 Appendix Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 APPENDIX A 4 Signal I O Definitions Software Versions 1 0 3 T Series A 3 E Series Table A 4 Signal I O Definitions Signal Name Bit or Channel Description Number Internal inputs U7 J108 pins 9 16 bits 0 7 default address 322 hex 0 7 Spare Internal outputs U8 J108 pins 1 8 bits 0 7 default address 322 hex 0 5 Spare I2C RESET 6 1 reset p
68. a 5 under range Figure 3 8 provides installation instructions and illustrates a sample combination of one current output and two voltage outputs configuration The section following this provides instructions for converting current loop analog outputs to standard 0 to 5 VDC outputs Information on calibrating or adjusting these outputs can be found in Section 5 9 3 7 34 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual J19 J21 J23 Analog Output Setup For voltage output of any one two or all 1 Jumper two leftmost pins 2 Jumper next two leftmost pins 3 Calibrate per Analog Configuration menu J19 J21 J23 For current output of any one two or all 1 Remove jumper shunts 2 Install Current Loop option 3 Calibrate per Analog Configuration menu CPU Current Loop option 19 installed on J21 Motherboard Example setup install jumper shunts for voltage output on J19 and J23 remove jumper shunts and install Current Loop option for current output on J21 Figure 3 8 Current Loop Option Installed CONVERTING CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS TO STANDARD VOLTAGE OUTPUTS CAUTION Servicing or handling of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge ESD protection i e ESD grounding straps mats and containers Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty See Section 0 for more inform
69. and offset O2CNC1 concentration for range 1 O2CNC2 Oe concentration for range 2 96 CO2CN1 CO concentration for range 1 96 CO2CN2 CO concentration for range 2 96 STABIL Concentration stability 1 96 O2TEMP sensor cell temperature O2DUTY sensor cell temperature controller duty cycle Fraction 0 0 off 1 0 on full 2 sensor cell temperature CO2DTY sensor cell temperature controller duty cycle Fraction 0 0 off 1 0 on full SMPFLW Sample flow cc m SMPPRS Sample pressure Hg BOXTMP Internal box temperature REFGND Ground reference REF mV RF4096 4096 mV reference REF 4096 MV mV 07275B DCN6418 A 25 Appendix Models T802 802 Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Name Description Units XIN1 External analog input 1 value Volts XIN1SLPE 5 External analog input 1 slope eng unit V XIN1OFST 5 External analog input 1 value eng unit XIN2 5 External analog input 2 value Volts XIN2SLPE External analog input 2 slope eng unit V XIN2OFST 5 External analog input 2 value eng unit XIN3 5 External analog input 3 value Volts 5 External analog input 3 slope eng unit V XIN3OFST 5 External analog input 3 value eng unit XIN4 5 External analog input 4 value Volts XIN4SLPE 5 External analog input 4 slope eng unit V XIN4OFST External anal
70. applicable in the T802 which reports in when measuring and when reporting CO 07275B DCN6418 135 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 02 XXX XX SETUP SETUPXX PRIMARY SETUP MENU PASS CLK MORE EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU iG EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU 2 SET SET EDIT EXIT HESSEN STATUS FLAGS HESSEN VARIATION TYPE1 SET EDIT SETUP X X Continue pressing SET until CH and CH move the cursor brackets left and right along the bit string PREV NEXT BOX TEMP WARNING 0000 EDIT PRNT EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until desired flag message is displayed PREV NEXT 02 CELL TEMP WARN 0000 EDIT PRNT EXIT 02 CELL TEMP WARNING 0 000 DEL deletes the character currently inside the cursor brackets CH CH ENTR EXIT INS DEL 0 EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting INS Inserts a the character at the current location of the cursor brackets The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 6 5 2 9 INSTRUMENT ID Press repeated
71. by the user using the APICOM software To enable automatic COM port reporting follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 RS232 Use the PREV and PREVNEXT NEXT buttons to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be edited INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X NAME CONC SET gt EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET or gt until SETUP X X 232 REPORT ON SET SET EDIT PRNT RS 232 REPORT ON ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle to turn the setting RS 232 REPORT ENTR accepts the feature ON OFF new setting gt 07275B DCN6418 153 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 7 1 4 8 ENABLING DISABLING THE HOLD OFF FEATURE The DAS HOLD OFF feature prevents data collection during calibration operations To enable or disable the HOLD OFF follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press Starting at tte EDIT CHANNEL MENU 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 RS232 SETUP X X PREV NEXT DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT INS Press PREV and NEXT to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be edited SET EDIT Continue pressing SET or SET gt until SETUP X X CAL HOLD OFF OFF NAME CONC SET SET EDIT SETUP X X CAL HOLD OFF OFF ENTR EXIT OFF Toggle to turn the HOLDO
72. calibration C t Ti TIME E The current time This is used to create a time stamp on DAS ene ne readings and by the AUTOCAL feature to trigger calibration events 1 Only appears when the optional CO sensor is installed 4 3 CALIBRATION MODE The T802 will switch into calibration mode when the user touches the CAL button In this mode the user can in conjunction with introducing zero or span gases of known concentrations into the analyzer cause it to adjust and recalculate the slope gain and offset of the its measurement range This mode is also used to check the current calibration status of the instrument For more information about setting up and performing standard calibration operations or checks see Section 9 Calibration Procedures Note It is recommended that span calibration be performed at 80 of full scale of the analyzer s currently selected reporting range EXAMPLES If the reporting range is set for 0 to 50 an appropriate span point would be 40 If the of the reporting range is set for 0 to 100 an appropriate span point would be 80 66 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Basic Operation 4 4 SETUP MODE The SETUP mode contains a variety of choices that are used to configure the analyzer s hardware and software features perform diagnostic procedures gather information on the instrument s performance and configure or access data from the in
73. convenience the diagrams are collected here SAMPLE GAS INLET EXHAUST GAS OUTLET L4 Particulate Filter Sample Gas Flow Control connects directly to EXHAUST gas outlet if internal pump not opted for PUMP INSTRUMENT CHASSIS Sensor PCA Flow Pressure SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR Om SAMPLE GAS FLOW SENSOR Figure 11 5 T802 Basic Internal Gas Flow 204 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Troubleshooting and Service SAMPLE GAS INLET EXHAUST GAS OUTLET INSTRUMENT Particulate S Probe CHASSIS Flow Pressure Sensor PCA pressure SENSOR Sample Gas Flow Control PUMP connects directly to EXHAUST gas SAMPLE outlet if internal pump not opted for GAS FLOW option SENSOR Figure 11 6 T802 Internal Pneumatics with CO Sensor Option 67 11 3 2 TYPICAL SAMPLE GAS FLOW PROBLEMS 11 3 2 1 FLOW IS ZERO The unit displays a SAMPLE FLOW warning message on the front panel display or the SAMPLE FLOW test function reports a zero or very low flow rate Confirm that the sample pump is operating turning If not use an AC voltmeter to make sure that power is being supplied to the pump If no power is present at the electrical leads of t
74. display rear panel connectors and internal chassis layout 3 2 1 FRONT PANEL Figure 3 1 shows the analyzer s front panel layout followed by a close up of the display screen in Figure 3 2 which is described in Table 3 3 The two USB ports on the front panel are provided for the connection of peripheral devices e plug in mouse not included to be used as an alternative to the touchscreen interface e thumb drive not included to download updates to instruction software contact TAPI Technical Support for information USB Ports Display Screen PB ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION T Series Model Name Label Power On Off Switch Figure 3 1 Front Panel Layout 07275B DCN6418 25 Section 11 Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 14 84 9 o EHEHENM Figure 3 2 Display Screen and Touch Control ATTENTION The front panel liquid crystal display screen includes touch control Upon analyzer start up the screen shows a splash screen and other initialization indicators before the main display appears similar to Figure 3 2 above may or may not display a Fault alarm The LEDs on the display screen indicate the Sample Calibration and Fault states also on the screen is the gas concentration field Conc which displays real time readouts for the primary gas and for the secondary
75. instrument commands This feature is of particular use for instruments connected to Multidrop or N A Hessen protocol networks Call Technical Support for activation Second Language Switch activates an alternate set of display N A messages in a language other than the instrument s default language N A Call Technical Support for a specially programmed Disk on Module containing the second language Dilution Ratio Option allows the user to compensate for diluted sample gas such as in continuous emission monitoring CEM where N A the quality of gas in a smoke stack is being tested and the sampling method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes the gas Call Technical Support for activation Sections 3 4 3 2 and 5 4 4 20 07275B DCN6418 2 SPECIFICATIONS APPROVALS amp COMPLIANCE 2 1 SPECIFICATIONS Table 2 1 T802 Specifications PARAMETER SPECIFICATION Sensor Ranges Min 0 196 Full scale Max 0 100 Full scale user selectable Zero Noise lt 0 02 RMS Span Noise 0 0596 of reading RMS Lower Detectable Limit lt 0 04 Zero Drift lt 0 02 24 hours lt 0 05 7 days Span Drift lt 0 1 7 days Accuracy lt 10 196 Linearity lt 0 1 Temperature Coefficient lt 0 01 degree CO Sensor Option Ranges Min 0 196 Full scale 0 20 Full scale user selectable dual ranges and auto ranging supported Zero N
76. internally wired specifically for RS 232 communication see Table 1 1 Communication Cables and the preceding subsection RS 232 Connection 44 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual uy Female DB9 Male DB9 Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer Last Analyzer 2 2 2 com2 Ensure jumper is installed between JP2 pins 21 lt gt 22 last instrument of multidrop chain Figure 3 15 RS 232 Multidrop PCA Host Analyzer Interconnect Diagram 7 BEFORE communicating from the host power on the instruments and check that the Machine ID is unique for each Section 5 7 16 5 2 9 a In the SETUP Mode menu go to SETUP gt MORE gt COMM gt ID The default ID is typically the model number or 0 b to change the identification number press the button below the digit to be changed Press select ENTER to accept the new ID for that instrument 8 Next in the SETUP gt MORE gt COMM gt COM1 menu do not use the COM2 menu for multidrop edit the COM1 MODE parameter as follows press select EDIT and set only QUIET MODE COMPUTER MODE and MULTIDROP MODE to ON Do not change any other settings 9 Press select ENTER to accept the changed settings and ensure that COM1 MODE now shows 35 10 Press select SET to go to the COM1 BAUD RATE menu and ensure it reads the same for all instruments edit as needed so that all instruments are set at the same baud rate Note Te
77. is too small the recording device will over range If the Range is too big the device will show minimal or no apparent change in readings Indicates noise level of instrument or concentration of sample gas See Section 11 3 for STABIL causes PRES See Table 11 1 for SAMPLE PRES WARN SAMPLE FL Check for gas flow problems see Section 11 3 O2 CELL TEMP Temperatures outside of the specified range or oscillating temperatures are cause for concern BOX TEMP If the box temperature is out of range check fan in the power supply module Areas to the side and rear of instrument should allow adequate ventilation See Table 11 1 for BOX TEMP WARNING O2 SLOPE Values outside range indicate Contamination of the zero air or span gas supply Instrument is miscalibrated Blocked gas flow Bad incorrect span gas concentration due O2 OFFSET Values outside range indicate contamination of the zero air supply 11 1 3 DIAG gt SIGNAL USING THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I O FUNCTION The signal I O diagnostic mode allows access to the digital and analog I O in the analyzer Some of the digital signals can be controlled through the keyboard These signals combined with a thorough understanding of the instruments Theory of Operation found in Section 12 are useful for troubleshooting in three Ways The technician can view the raw unprocessed signal level of the analyzers critical inputs and outputs e Many o
78. last 480 averages are stored 20 days This channel is useful for diagnosing problems that cause the instruments measurements to drift slowly over time FAST Almost identical to DETAIL except that for each parameter e Samples are taken once per minute and reported once per minute in effect causing the instrument to record an instantaneous reading of each parameter every minute e last 360 readings for each parameter are recorded reported This channel is useful for diagnosing transients spikes and noise problems These default Data Channels can be used as they are or they can be customized from the front panel to fit a specific application They can also be deleted to make room for custom user programmed Data Channels Appendix A 5 lists the firmware specific DAS configuration in plain text format This text file either can be loaded into APICOM and then modified and uploaded to the instrument or can be copied and pasted into a terminal program to be sent to the analyzer IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Sending a DAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports g configuration and will delete all stored data Back up any existing data and the DAS configuration before uploading new settings 07275B DCN6418 141 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Triggering Events and Data Parameters Functions for these default channels are List of Chann
79. of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon PLC Programmable Logic Controller a device that is used to control instruments based on a logic level signal coming from the analyzer PLD Programmable Logic Device PLL Phase Lock Loop PMT Photo Multiplier Tube a vacuum tube of electrodes that multiply electrons collected and charged to create a detectable current signal P N or PN Part Number PSD Prevention of Significant Deterioration PIFE Poly Tetra Fluoro Ethylene a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that may react on other surfaces one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride a polymer used for downstream tubing Rdg Reading RS 232 specification and standard describing a serial communication method between DTE Data Terminal Equipment and DCE Data Circuit terminating Equipment devices using a maximum cable length of 50 feet 07275B DCN6418 249 A Primer Electro Static Discharge Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Term Description Definition RS 485 specification and standard describing a binary serial communication method among multiple devices at a data rate faster than RS 232 with a much longer distance between the host and the furthest device SAROAD Storage and Retrieval of Aerometric Data SLAMS State and Local Air Monitoring Network Plan SLPM Standard Liters Per Minute of a gas at standard temperature a
80. or loses LO 07275B DCN6418 87 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 SETUP MORE gt DIAG DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUP MORE DIAG menu These tools be used in a variety of troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures and are referred to in many places of the maintenance and trouble shooting sections of this manual The various operating modes available under the DIAG menu are Table 5 3 Diagnostic Mode DIAG Functions Front Panel Mode MANUAL DIAG SUBMENU SUBMENU FUNCTION Indicator SECTION Allows observation of all digital and analog signals in the instrument Allows certain digital signals such as SIGNAL heaters to be toggled ON and OFF These DIAG 11 1 3 parameters are dependent on firmware revision see Appendix A When entered the analyzer performs an analog ANALOG OUTPUT output step test This can be used to calibrate a DIAG AOUT 11 6 9 2 chart recorder or to test the analog output accuracy This submenu allows the user to configure the analyzer s analog output channels including choosing what parameter will be output on each ANALOG I O channel Instructions that appear here allow CONFIGURATION adjustment and calibration of the voltage signals DIAG AIO 593 associated with each output as well as calibration of the analog to digital converter circu
81. panel can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of the analyzer s theory of operation see Section 12 The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in the Nominal Range column of the analyzer Final Test and Validation Data Sheet PN 068350000 shipped with the instrument Values outside these acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the analyzer s subsystems Functions whose values are still within the acceptable range but have significantly changed from the measurement recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a failure A worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the value of these test functions This worksheet also includes expected values for the various test functions The following table contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range 07275B DCN6418 199 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Table 11 2 Test Functions Indicated Failures TEST FUNCTIONS As Displayed INDICATED FAILURE S Time of day clock is too fast or slow TIME To adjust See Section 5 6 Battery in clock chip on CPU board may be dead Incorrectly configured measurement range s could cause response problems with a RANGE Data logger or chart recorder attached to one of the analog output If the Range selected
82. range 1 O2 SLOPE1 1 0 5 2 Oe slope for range 1 O2 OFFSET1 96 0 10 10 Oe offset for range 1 CO2 TARG SPANt 96 12 0 1 1000 Target concentration during span calibration of range 1 CO2 SLOPE1 1 0 5 5 slope for range 1 CO2_OFFSET1 0 10 10 offset for range 1 O2 TARG SPAN2 96 20 95 0 1 100 Target O2 concentration during span calibration of range 2 O2 SLOPE2 1 0 5 2 Oz slope for range 2 O2_OFFSET2 0 10 10 offset for range 2 CO2 TARG SPAN 96 12 0 1 1000 Target concentration during span calibration of range 2 CO2 SLOPE2 1 0 5 5 CO slope for range 2 CO2 OFFSET2 96 0 10 10 CO offset for range 2 RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL Range control mode Enclose DUAL value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 AUTO interface CONC RANGE1 96 100 0 1 500 D A concentration range 1 CONC RANGE2 96 100 0 1 500 D A concentration range 2 CONC RANGE3 96 15 0 1 500 D A concentration range 3 07275B DCN6418 Appendix Models T802 802 Appendix Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Range Description Units Value SAMP FLOW SET cc m 120 0 6000 Sample flow set point for flow Warnings calculation and warning limits 80 180 SAMP FLOW SLOPE 1 0 5 1 5 Sample flow slope correction factor adjusted flow measured flow x slope SAMP PRESS SET Hg 29 92 0
83. se B ns MH 17 Yo Pl ee MHZ 2 3 mas 109 7 vow M U6 nea t ar EA 5 0832 1 ny z Te n o OE YEN ee tg 0 R54 e E CHASSIS cmn y2 1 x yap s 17 CLKOUT N 0755 a Si i z 1 To bDCLK CLKOUT 08 m GXOUTN H Grm 4 a CLKINP 2 HEADER X2 SHTDN 26 ne 28 voc R40 36 vec G3168 05000202 00 E g 100 Qoo a vo 12 LVDS VCC 019 207 po FBMHSZIGHMSOINT 7 NOTE LVDSGND 3 2 1 GND To receive backlight control BACKL from CPU board LVDSGND 25 4 FB6 18 typscnp 73 when using ICOP 0096 LVDS Transmitter 19 GND ag The connection from pin 42 on the TTL video connector er 21 BIGND GND VSYNC to U1 23 must be broken and connected to 14 A PLLGND GND pin 43 Veo PIN 28 VecPIN36 VecPIN42 Vec PIN 48 RUNS eoru 22uF 63V IMK3IGBI226KL ooi oor ooi Css cse Tess Joo D Tile GUI Interface Number Revision B 06698 D Du 8242010 Sheet pof 4 File NAPCEMGRY 06696 3586402 Drawn RT 1 2 3 4 5 6 07275B DCN6418 072758 DCN6418 MTI MT2
84. teledyne com WEB SITE www teledyne api com Table 1 1 Analyzer Options Option Option Description Notes Reference Number Pumps Pumps meet all typical AC power supply standards while exhibiting same pneumatic performance 10A External Pump 100V 120V 60 Hz N A 10B External Pump 220V 240V 50 Hz N A 10C External Pump 220V 240V 60 Hz N A 10D External Pump 100V 120V 50 Hz N A 10E External Pump 100V 60 Hz 14 Internal Pump N A 13 High Voltage Internal Pump 240V 50Hz N A Mount Options for mounting the analyzer in standard 19 racks 20A Rack mount brackets with 26 in chassis slides N A 20B Rack mount brackets with 24 in chassis slides N A 21 Rack mount brackets only compatible with carrying strap Option 29 N A 23 Rack mount for external pump pack no slides N A 18 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Introduction Features and Options A Option Option Description Notes Reference Number Carrying Strap Handle Side mounted strap for hand carrying analyzer Extends from flat position to accommodate hand for carrying 29 Recesses to 9mm 3 8 dimension for storage be used with rack mount brackets Option 21 Cannot be used with rack mount slides CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD THE T802 WEIGHS ABOUT 28 POUNDS 12 7 KG TAKE CARE TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY WHEN
85. the RANGE test function displayed on the front panel will be replaced by two separate functions e O2RNT1 The range setting for the A1 output e O2rn2 The range setting for the A2 output To select the DUAL range mode press following keystroke sequence SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX ST ST gt CAL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 5 ISETUP RANGE MODE MENU MODE SET EXIT SETUP RANGE MODE SNGL SNGLDUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP RANGE MODE DUAL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP XX RANGE MODE MENU When the instrument s range mode is set to Dual the concentration field in the upper right hand corner of the display alternates between displaying the low range value and the high range value The concentration that would be displayed is identified as follows 21 LOW or A1 and O2H HIGH or A2 In DUAL range mode O2L and O2H have separate slopes and offsets for computing O concentrations The two ranges must be independently calibrated 74 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Note If the optional CO sensor is installed the concentration field of the T802 s display will report a value labeled CO2 RANGE Only one test function is available CO2 RNG which reflects the range setting for C2L and only this value is reported
86. the T802 firmware being run will appear after the word SETUP CAL 02 Z type Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure CAL O2 S type Unit is performing SPAN calibration procedure CAL CO2 Z type Unit is performing CO ZERO calibration procedure when the optional CO sensor is installed CAL CO2 S type Unit is performing CO SPAN calibration procedure when the optional CO sensor is installed DIAG Mode One of the analyzer s diagnostic modes is active Section 5 9 type 2M initiated manually by the user via the front panel touchscreen 5R initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Basic Operation 4 2 SAMPLE MODE This is the analyzer s standard operating mode In this mode the instrument is analyzing the gas in the sample chamber calculating concentration and reporting this information to the user via the front panel display the analog outputs and if set up properly the RS 232 485 Ethernet ports A variety of TEST functions are available for viewing at the front panel whenever the analyzer is at the MAIN MENU These functions provide information about the various functional parameters related to the analyzers operation and its measurement of gas concentrations This information is particularly useful when troubleshooting a performance problem see Section 11 1 2 T
87. the converter s offset and slope and uses these factors for subsequent conversions See Section 5 9 3 2 for instructions on performing this calibration 12 5 6 2 SENSOR INPUTS The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A D through the master multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard 100K terminating resistors on each of the inputs prevent cross talk from appearing on the sensor signals 12 5 6 3 SAMPLE PRESSURE AND FLOW These are analog signals from two sensors that measure the pressure and flow rate of the gas stream at the outlet of the sample chamber This information is used in two ways First the sample pressure is used by the CPU to calculate Concentration Second the pressure and flow rate are monitored as a test function to assist the user in predicting and troubleshooting failures 12 5 6 4 THERMISTOR INTERFACE This circuit provides excitation termination and signal selection for several negative coefficient thermistor temperature sensors located inside the analyzer there is a thermistor for the sample chamber housing which reports the current temperature of the chamber housing to the CPU as part of the bench heater control loop Another thermistor attached to the motherboard measures the analyzer s inside temperature box temperature This information is stored by the CPU and can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes via the front panel display See Section 11 1 2 12 5 6 5 AN
88. the quality records file for this instrument 1 Carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping damage as follows a Remove the locking screw located in the top center of the Front panel b Remove the two flat head Phillips screws on the sides of the instrument one per side towards the rear C Slide the cover backwards until it clears the analyzer s front bezel d Liftthe cover straight up 2 Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other components are in good shape and properly seated 3 Check that the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses are firmly and properly seated 4 Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed These are listed on the paperwork accompanying the analyzer 24 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 3 1 1 VENTILATION CLEARANCE Whether the analyzer is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack be sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance Table 3 1 Ventilation Clearance AREA MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE Back of the instrument 4 in Sides of the instrument 1in Above and below the instrument 1 in Various rack mount kits are available for this analyzer See Table 1 1 of this manual for more information 3 2 INSTRUMENT LAYOUT Instrument layout shows front panel and
89. the range press Toggled these buttons to select the upper SPAN limit for the shared Oz reporting range Toggled these keys to select the upper SPAN limit for the gt reporting range NOTE Only appears if the optional CO2 Sensor is installed J 27 RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT RANGE MODE MENU EXIT SETUP XX RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP XX RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP XX RANGE MODE MENU SET EXIT SETUP XX 02 RANGE 100 00 1 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP XX 2 RANGE 15 00 1 5 o 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 07275B DCN6418 73 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 4 3 2 RNGE gt MODE gt DUAL CONFIGURING THE T802 ANALYZER FOR DUAL Note RANGE MODE Selecting the DUAL range mode allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with different reporting ranges The analyzer software calls these two ranges RNG low and RNG2 high e The O2L RANGE 1 setting corresponds with the analog output labeled A1 on the rear panel of the instrument O2H RANGE 2 setting corresponds with the A2 output In DUAL range mode
90. to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a computer QUIET 1 program where such intermittent messages might cause communication problems Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them COMPUTER 2 Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is communicating with a computer operated control program HESSEN 16 The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries TELEDYNE PROTOCOL API PN 02252 contains more information on this protocol 8 1 8192 When turned on this mode switches the COM port settings from s e NO PARITY 8 data bits 1 stop bit to EVEN PARITY 8 data bits 1 stop bit 7 1 2048 When turned on this mode switches the COM port settings from eu e NOPARITY 8 DATA BITS 1 stop bit to EVEN PARITY 7 DATA BITS 1 stop bit Configures the COM2 Port for RS 485 communication RS 485 mode has precedence 93 485 1024 over multidrop mode if both are enabled SECURITY 4 When enabled the serial port requires a password before it will respond see Section 8 4 The only command that is active is the help screen CR MULTIDROP 32 Multidrop protocol allows a multi instrument configuration on a single communications PROTOCOL channel Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs ENABLE 64 Enables to send a modem initialization string at power up Asserts certain lines in the MODEM RS 232 port to enable the modem to communicate ERROR 1
91. with a clean damp cloth Do NOT submerge any part of the instrument and do NOT use any cleaning solution 07275B DCN6418 193 Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank 194 07275B DCN6418 Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 11 TROUBLESHOOTING AND SERVICE This section describes a variety of methods for identifying the source of performance problems with the analyzer Also included here are procedures that are used to repair the instrument Before working with the casing open be sure to turn off power supply and perform air or 2 gas purging of not only the analyzer inside but also the sample gas line In addition carefully prevent oil and grease from adhering to any piping Otherwise poisoning fire or explosion may be caused due to gas leakage etc HAZARD STRONG OXIDIZER OXYGEN IS A STRONG OXIDIZER QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY A The operations outlined in this Section must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only A CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK Some operations need to be carried out with the instrument open and running Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or mechanical damage to the analyzer Do not drop tools into the analyzer or leave them after your procedures Do not shorte
92. 0 let cal gas in 1 let sample gas in O2 SPAN VALVE 5 7 0 let O2 span gas in 1 let zero gas in 07275B DCN6418 A 21 Appendix Models T802 802 Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Signal Name Bit or Channel Description Number CO2 SPAN VALVE 8 0 let CO2 span gas in 1 let zero gas in VENT VALVE 9 0 open vent valve 1 close vent valve 10 15 Spare Rear board primary MUX analog inputs Spare 4 Temperature MUX 5 Spare O2 SENSOR 6 concentration sensor SAMPLE PRESSURE 7 Sample pressure 8 Spare REF 4096 MV 9 4 096V reference from MAX6241 SAMPLE FLOW 10 Sample flow rate CO2 CONC SENSOR 11 concentration sensor 12 13 Spare thermocouple input 14 DAC MUX REF GND 15 Ground reference Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs BOX TEMP 0 Internal box temperature 1 Spare CO2 CELL TEMP 2 sensor cell temperature 3 Spare O2 CELL TEMP 4 Oe sensor cell temperature 5 7 Spare Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs DAC CHAN 1 0 DAC channel 0 loopback DAC CHAN 2 1 DAC channel 1 loopback DAC CHAN 3 2 DAC channel 2 loopback DAC CHAN 4 3 DAC channel 3 loopback Rear board analog outputs CONC OUT 1 0 Concentration output 1 DATA OUT 1 Data output 1 CONC OUT 2 1 Concentration output 2 DATA OUT 2 Data output 2 CONC OUT 3 a 2 Concentration out
93. 0 0 D A 1 range in independent range mode CO2RANGE CO2 RN1 500 0 O2RANGE2 O2 RN2 500 0 D A 2 range in independent range mode CO2RANGE2 CO2 RN2 500 0 O2RANGE 02 RNG 100 D A 3 range CO2RANGE CO2 RNG 100 STABILITY STABIL 0 0 Concentration stability O2 STB 0 0 or CO2 STB 0 0 SAMPPRESS PRES 29 9 IN HG A Sample pressure SAMPFLOW SAMP FL 100 CC M Sample flow rate O2SLOPE 2 SLOPE 0 980 slope computed during zero span calibration O2OFFSET O2 OFST 1 79 Oe offset computed during zero span calibration CO2SLOPE CO2 SLOPE 1 0000 slope computed during zero span calibration CO2OFFSET CO2 OFST 0 00 CO offset computed during zero span calibration O2CELLTEMP O2 CELL TEMP 50 2 C Oe sensor cell temperature CO2CELLTEMP CO2 CELL TEMP 50 2 C CO sensor cell temperature BOXTEMP BOX 35 5 C Internal chassis temperature 02 O2 0 00 concentration co2 CO2 0 00 concentration TESTCHAN TEST 3721 1 MV Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output selected with TEST_CHAN_ID variable XIN1 AIN1 37 15 EU External analog input 1 value in engineering units XIN2 AIN2 37 15 EU External analog input 2 value in engineering units XIN3 AIN3 37 15 EU External analog input 3 value in engineering units XIN4 AIN4 37 15 EU External analog input 4 value in engineering units
94. 0 000 CH CH DEL ENTR EXIT SET SET EDIT uh MASK 2 55 255 255 0 TCP PORT 3000 CH CH DEL ENTR EXIT SET I The PORT number needs to remain at 3000 Pressing EXIT from Do not change this setting unless instructed to by any of the above Teledyne API s Customer Service personnel display menus causes the Ethemet card to reinitialize its internal interface INITIALIZING INET 0 firmware M A INITIALIZING INET 100 INITIALIZATION SUCCEEDED INITIALIZATION FAILED Contact your IT Network Administrator SETUP COMMUNI CATIONS MENU ID INET EXIT 122 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 6 3 2 1 CHANGING THE ANALYZER S HOSTNAME The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network e default name for all Teledyne T802 analyzers is T802 To change this name particularly if you have more than one T802 analyzer on your network press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 OZ XXXXX SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP Xx ENTER PASSWORD 818 PASS CLK MORE EXIT 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP xx DHCP ON EXIT SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP XX COMMUNICATIONS MENU 10 INET COM 2 EXIT Continue pressing SET until
95. 02 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures Table 10 1 T802 Maintenance Schedule DATE PERFORMED UL Particulate Weekly or as Filter Replace needed Weekly or after Verify Test Record and any Functions analyze Maintenance or Repair Pump Diaphragm Replace Annually Perform Flow Check Check Flow Annually Annually Perform Verify Leak after any Leak Check Tight Maintenance or Repair Pneumatic Examine and Yes if lines clean cleaned Only if Chassis Wipe down As needed cover removed 1875 DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures Table 10 2 T802 Test Function Record DATE RECORDED FUNCTION STABIL OPERATING MODE 02 ZERO CAL SAMPLE O2SLOPE SPAN CAL O2 OFFSET ZERO CAL 188 07275B DCN6418 Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 10 2 PREDICTIVE DIAGNOSTICS The Test Functions can be used to predict failures by looking at how their values change over time Initially it may be useful to compare the state of these Test Functions to the values recorded on the printed record of the final calibration performed on your instrument at the factory Table 10 3 can be used as a basis for taking ac
96. 1 DROS il Tie Dn 3E 019 TR ak Bo ae aS a E m SMEMR 6 USA SMEMW ik 4 JE De 14 pps KEY Hes ram te usta Eire jet abs j 1248 10V ENDAFR s amp 3 ui ie Je Cum Xe RQ 2 4 sv Er RO ue c 000514 Ed i E 2 ra E RESETDRV E FRE e x SHDN wad amiss 18 Do g E en u oqo 9 ESED 20 ps7 056 E cr IDA Er 4 2 E non 2 m i m 1c0000184 BLUE BUE Y 25 mon Deen or 2 ne m u T eot PE pong 28 0 15 uF ceric au 8 Er wo E n R L 5 wor RESET 7 it af n K vo 25 86 pm 000191 Pies nk Nac Ms Schematic for E Series G5 Motherboard PCA PN 05802 schematic is for 05802 0 4 2 This schematic is for 05801 TE Revision Orad B 05803 B Da a CRUS jakiraiendigtion S SourceUSSUTb ddb 3 a a NSPCBMGRUSSUTRTE 6
97. 1 and Section 6 5 2 for Hessen protocol 40 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate internal wiring that makes the link inoperable Check cables acquired from sources other than Teledyne for pin assignments before using Received from the factory the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem with Pin 3 of the DB 9 connector designated for receiving data and Pin 2 designated for sending data e COM1 RS 232 fixed DB 9 male connector e Baud rate 115200 bits per second baud Data Bits 8 data bits with 1 stop bit e Parity None e 2 RS 232 configurable to RS 485 DB 9 female connector e Baud rate 19200 bits per second baud Data Bits 8 data bits with 1 stop bit e Parity None Male DB 9 RS 232 seen from outside analyzer GND GND DCE mode Figure 3 12 Default Pin Assignments Rear Panel COM Port Connectors The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10 pin connectors on the CPU card J11 and J12 Figure 3 12 07275B DCN6418 41 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual
98. 1 0 2mA 0 5 4 1 2 20 5 6 14 72 1 8 3 40 92 23 10 4 2 6 4 60 12 8 32 13 6 34 5 80 16 4 4 1 16 8 42 6 100 20 5 20 5 212 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Troubleshooting and Service 11 6 9 3 STATUS OUTPUTS 11 6 10 CPU The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs 1 Connect a jumper between the D pin and the V pin on the status output connector 2 Connect a 1000 ohm resistor between the pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested 3 Connect a voltmeter between the V pin and the pin of the output being tested see table below Under the DIAG SIGNAL I O menu See Section11 1 3 scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to the output in question Alternately turn on and off the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter it should vary between 0 volts for ON and 5 volts for OFF Table 11 8 Status Outputs Check PIN LEFT TO RIGHT STATUS SYSTEM OK CONC VALID ZERO CAL O2 SPAN CAL ZERO CAL RNG2 CO ZERO CAL SPARE SPARE There are two major types of failures associated with the CPU board complete failure and a failure associated with the Disk On Module DOM on the CPU board If either of these failures occurs contact the factory For complete failures assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is int
99. 1 2 2 RELAY PCA STATUS INDICATORS There are sixteen status indicator LEDs located on the Relay PCA Some are not used on this model 11 2 2 1 C BUS WATCHDOG STATUS LEDS The most important is D1 which indicates the health of the C bus Table 11 3 Relay PCA Watchdog LED Failure Indications LED Function Fault Status Indicated Failure s Failed Halted CPU D1 C bus Health Continuously Faulty Motherboard Keyboard or Relay mus or Faulty Connectors Wiring between Motherboard Red Watchdog Circuit Continuously OFF Keyboard or Relay PCA Failed Faulty 5 VDC Power Supply PS1 If D1 is blinking then the other LEDs can be used in conjunction with DIAG Menu Signal I O to identify hardware failures of the relays and switches on the Relay PCA 202 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Troubleshooting and Service 11 2 2 2 RELAY PCA STATUS LED S D6 Yellow O2 Sensor Heater D5 Yellow CO Sensor Heater only with CO option 000000 D1 RED Watchdog Indicator Figure 11 4 Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting Table 11 4 Relay PCA Status LED Failure Indications LED Color Function Oetaut Site pi Red Watchdog Circuit
100. 100 ERMER INTERCONNECT m T80X 2 All items in Dashed boxes are NA CAGE CODE NO DWG NO optional 1JZF4 07580 SAE DNS 10 07275 DCN6418 0 6 0 2 07275B DCN6418 072758 DCN6418 2 3 TA D gt Ui HC D GND AB 79 AD nbi Loa gt 1 S 20 Acc nb ior 2 A mos up 2 12 N
101. 11 6 11 RS 232 Communications 11 6 12 Optional CO Senso 11 7 Repair Procedures 11 7 1 Repairing Sample Flow Control Assembly 11 7 2 Disk On Module Replacement Procedure 11 8 FAQ s 11 9 Technical Assistance 12 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 12 1 Paramagnetic Oxygen Measurement 07275B DCN6418 xi Table of Contents Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 12 131 Magnetic Properties Gas 1 er tanen tei 219 12 1 2 Principle of Measurement 12 2 NDIR Measurement of CO 12 2 1 Operation within the T802 Analyzer 12 3 Pneumatic Operation 12 3 1 Pneumatic Operation of the Senso 12 4 Flow Rate Control 12 4 1 Critical Flow Orifice 12 4 2 Particulate Filter 12 4 3 Pneumatic Sensors 12 5 Electronic Operation Overview Electronic Operation Central Processing Unit CPU Relay Board Heater Control Motherboard Front Panel Touch Screen Display Interface 5 8 Software Operation 12 5 9 Adaptive Filter 10 Calibration Slope and Offset 12 5 11 Temperature and Pressure Compensation 12 5 12 Internal Data Acquisition System DAS 13 A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE 13 1 How Static Charges are Created 13 2 How Electro Static Charges Cause Damage 13 3 Common Myths About ESD Damage 13 4 Basic Principles of Static Control 13 4 1 General Rules 13 4 2 Basic Anti ESD Procedur
102. 18 93 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Toggle to set the signal level and type of the selected From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V OVR NOCAL SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE 5V Pressing ENTR records lt SET SET EDIT EXIT the new setting and returns to the previous menu Pressing EXIT ignores the DIAGAIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE 5V new setting and retums to the previous menu channel 1V 5V 10V CURR ENTR EXIT 5 9 3 2 CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS Analog output calibration should to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer performed in the factory as part of the configuration process or whenever recalibration is required The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically either as a group or individually or adjusted manually In its default mode the instrument is configured for automatic calibration of all channels which is useful for clearing any analog calibration warnings associated with channels that will not be used or connected to any input or recording device e g data logger Manual calibration should be used for the 0 1V range or in cases where the outputs mus
103. 1s 10000 p if gt E 1 8 x 4 X 10000 pF bo 5 n Ene TAC i Bro rd GE X 3 5 9 16 10 D4 1s p Os dec 7 1 x 118 o 1T Sus 00 d iz Ds Qs 2 Er H Qs 136 4 common 5 2 EI E 3 1 H 7 4 135 FEBEAD 5 X 6 ys T To 2 FEBEAD vco y al 5 amp 10000 pF RNS 8 5 8 10000 pF 10000 pF SECS Pso702 4 1 16 1 2 x is van 3 1 1 4 x E BS 3 useless 5 12 Io m D 74HC32 Di 3 T 10 Fx FEBEAD TE 0 3m s B 5 Qr 10000 pF 6105 Qs NOM D 0 E ll xL maver 5 D 9 2 2 4 wo b DIODE SCHOTRY 3 1 10000pF m oo 1 RELAY SPDT p M 3 1 3 RELAY SPDT d c 3 bead avo i 4 10 5 u i 3 22K 5 I s0222 DIODE SCHOTTKY TERMBLOCK 12 RELAY 2 4 RI 22K 5 E T S0222 3 Schematic for E Series G5 Motherboard PCA PN 05802 Nader Tenn savera pars 1 B 3 n 5 07275B DCN6418
104. 2 REC OFS 0 mV SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 REC OFS 0 mV Toggle these buttons to set the value of the lesired offset 0 0 0 o ENTR EXIT DIAG CONC_OUT_2 REC OFS 10 mV 0 1 ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 REC OFS 10 mv lt SET SET EDIT EXIF 104 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 6 SELECTING A TEST CHANNEL FUNCTION FOR OUTPUT A4 The test functions available to be reported are Table 5 8 Test Channels Functions available on the T802 s Analog Output TEST CHANNEL DESCRIPTION ZERO FULL SCALE NONE Test Channel is turned off The absolute pressure of the Sample gas as SAMPLE PRESSURE measured by a pressure sensor located inside 0 Hg 40 Hg the sample chamber SAMPLE FLOW Sample mass flow rate as measured by the 0 1000 cm m flow rate sensor the sample gas stream The temperature of the gas inside the O2 O2 CELE TEMP sensor sample chamber orc 70 C The temperature of the gas inside the optional CD2CELL TEMP CO sensor sample chamber vc 70 C CHASSIS TEMP The temperature inside the analyzer chassis 0 C 70 C Once a function is selected the instrument not only begins to output a signal on the analog output but also adds TEST to the list of test functions viewable via the front panel display To activa
105. 2 Analyzer Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank 07275B DCN6418 111 07275B DCN6418 6 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND OPERATION This instrument s rear panel connections include an Ethernet port a USB port option and two serial communication COM ports labeled RS232 which is the COMI port and COM2 see Figure 3 2 Both COM ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with issue commands to and receive data from the analyzer through an external computer system or terminal Connection instructions were provided in Section 3 3 1 8 This section provides pertinent information regarding communication equipment describes the instrument s communications modes presents configuration instructions for the communications ports and provides instructions for their use including communications protocol Data acquisition is presented in Section 7 By default both COM ports operate on the RS 232 protocol 6 1 DATA TERMINAL COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT DTE DCE RS 232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment DTE and data communication equipment DCE Basic data terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices Electronically the difference between the DCE and DTE is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions devices receive data on Pin 2 and transmit data on Pin 3 DCE devices receiv
106. 2 CAL ON if unit is in high range of either the DUAL or AUTO range modes 6 CAL If this analyzer is equipped with an optional sensor this Output is ON when that sensor is in calibration mode Otherwise this output us unused 7 amp 8 SPARE D EMITTER BUS The emitters of the transistors on Pins 1 8 are bussed together DC POWER 5 VDC 300 mA source combined rating with Control Output if used v Digital Ground The ground level from the analyzer s internal DC power supplies 3 3 1 6 CONNECTING THE CONTROL INPUTS If you wish to use the analyzer to remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes several digital control inputs are provided through a 10 connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer s rear panel There are two methods for energizing the control inputs The internal 5V available from the pin labeled is the most convenient method Figure 3 10 left However if full isolation is required an external 5 VDC power supply should be used Figure 3 10 right 07275B DCN6418 37 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual CONTROL IN CONTROL IN RM ML s CAL MODE SPAN CAL CAL MODE SPAN CAL RANGE2 SPAN E lt o 2 g o RANGE2 SPAN CO2 option CAL 5 VDC Power Supply Local Power Connections External Power Connections Figure 3 10 Control Input Connector Table 3
107. 25 m 100000191 uer facia E US 7 14 as uso s s e m moo 1 AE vi Dis 00 as Ei 15 w bse 3 ENAR icem mj AF Y Bis 1 dg Erin rp D 3 vo J wao esas AID 74HC32 yn pS mim o An Yi ind mos Do a AE x YB Piso T T D 00 At AB da Yu Boe 1 1 00 008 n E cQ um 8 9 bane imum m jt pro me Di 1 22 mn 9 Mir 2 E B w Dx AIT vec 2 3 1 DE D S irme AB Hl AR ons Is pr bor Puls Tac B6 dm im is m ms Dr 14 12 x Bs 22K 5 07 E n Di a 13 m AUi DEFAULT D De AD IP INSTALLED Ds w Pins 182 shorted on PCB x ti De MM vec m DT AE AER 74HC74 LED RED smt 1206 A6 1 re 3 2 vm 32 e c RESET gt semet ACE ls 221 0 mur EE ERES 2 0 voc PCi04 A HEADER3 DEFAULTED 1 F 9 cx TP61TP6OTPS9 anp Jos uF conic m no w oo A vow sv IDCHEADER 5 226 96 i p Mo uro T EC DRY GSP xt 5 TC piper NE 1 4 ACK ia 8 Ex ret 5 RO Taauciauos usm 3 b rH RO m re vec 1 2 6 AD OH ROS E 19 RESET IRQS shorted sldr side oe 1 744008 Ha ssak 16 ED s KBINT REFRESH mS m Sd y 0 ES DRQL acr DACKI
108. 28 Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations CHECKING XON XOFF 256 Disables XON XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking HANDSHAKE HARDWARE Enables CTS RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking This style of data HANDSHAKE 8 transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument s APICOM software HARDWARE 512 Disables the HARDWARE FIFO First In First Out When FIFO is enabled it improves FIFO data transfer rate for that COM port COMMAND 4096 Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode PROMPT 1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the SETUP gt MORE gt COM gt COM 1 OR 2 gt MODE menu 2 The default setting for this feature is ON Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne API Technical Support personnel Note Communication Modes for each COM port must configured independently 114 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne 7802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Press the following button sequence to select communication modes for one of the COM Ports such as the following example where HESSEN is enabled SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS R PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM RS DIAG Combined Mode ID COM1 MODE 0 displayed here gt COM1 QUIET MODE OFF
109. 8 189 Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual To change the filter 1 Turn OFF the analyzer to prevent drawing debris into the instrument 2 Open the T802 s hinged front panel and unscrew the knurled retaining ring on the filter assembly RETAINING RING 061280000 WINDOW 016290000 O RING PTFE NOTCHED UP 037860000 BRACKET gt ut PTFE MEMBRANE FILTER ELEMENT FL0000094 1M FL0000006 5 3f O RING VITON 080000094 Je BODY 016270000 y CONNECTOR FITTING FT0000008 CONNECTOR FITTING FT0000008 Figure 10 1 Sample Particulate Filter Assembly 3 Carefully remove the retaining ring PTFE o ring glass filter cover and filter element 4 Replace the filter being careful that the element is fully seated and centered in the bottom of the holder 5 Re install the PTFE o ring with the notches up the glass cover then screw on the retaining ring and hand tighten Inspect the seal between the edge of filter and the o ring to assure a proper seal 6 Recstart the analyzer 10 3 2 REBUILDING THE SAMPLE PUMP The diaphragm in the sample pump periodically wears out and must be replaced A sample rebuild kit is available see Appendix B of this manual for the PN of the pump rebuild kit Instructions and diagrams are included with the kit Always perform a Flow and Leak Check after rebuildi
110. 858 657 9800 TOLL FREE 800 324 5190 07275B DCN6418 FAX 858 657 9816 1 Warranty Repair Questionnaire T80X M80XE 06532C DCN 5798 jw TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATIOI A Teledyne Technologies Company If possible please include a portion of a strip chart pertaining to the problem Circle pertinent data OTHER NOTES Thank you for providing this information Your assistance enables Teledyne API to respond faster to the problem that you are encountering TELEDYNE API CUSTOMER SERVICE EMAIL api customerservice teledyne com PHONE 858 657 9800 TOLL FREE 800 324 5190 858 657 9816 c2 07275B DCN6418 APPENDIX D Wire List and Electronic Schematics 07275B DCN6418 D 1 0 2 This page intentionally left blank 07275B DCN6418 T80X Interconnect List Reference 073800100A DCN6418 PN FROM Signal Assembly JP PN 1036490100 ASSY POWER Neutral Power Switch Power Power Entry CNO000073 Shield Power Gind Power Entr CNooo0073 Chassis Line Switched Power Switch 5110000025 77552 12 250000038 i Neu Switched Power Switch 510000025 _ 92 12 250000038 3 Power Gmd Power Entry CN0000073 B2 12 550000038 Neu Switched
111. ALIBRATION ENTR ACTUAL FLOW 120 CC M 2 0 ENTR GEXIT EXIT discards the new Toggle to match the actual setting flow as measured by the external flow meter ENTR accepts the new setting The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 178 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual Calibration Procedures 9 5 CALIBRATION OF THE OPTIONAL CO SENSOR 9 5 1 CO CALIBRATION SETUP The pneumatic connections for calibrating are as follows Source of VENT here if input SAMPLE GAS 1 pressurized Removed during E calibration z s 7 3128 HSA 2 88 6 glee 8 55 HIEH E t 5 258 A 8 Control 58 Figure 9 2 CO Sensor Calibration Set Up CO SENSOR ZERO GAS Teledyne API recommends using pure when calibration the zero point of your sensor option CO SENSOR SPAN GAS Teledyne API recommends using 16 in when calibration the span point of your CO sensor option Table 3 8 9 5 2 SET CO SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION Set the expected span gas concentration This should be equal to the percent concentration of the span gas of the selected reporting range default factory setting 16 ISAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX SETUP GAS TO CAL CO2
112. ALOG OUTPUTS The analyzer comes equipped with four analog outputs 1 A2 and 4 The type of data and electronic performance of these outputs are configurable by the user see Section 5 9 2 four analog outputs are connected back to the A D converter through a Loop back circuit This permits the voltage outputs to be calibrated by the CPU without need for any additional tools or fixtures 07275B DCN6418 233 Principles of Operation Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 12 5 6 6 EXTERNAL DIGITAL I O This External Digital I O performs status outputs and control inputs STATUS OUTPUTS Logic Level voltages are output through an optically isolated 8 pin connector located on the rear panel of the analyzer These outputs convey good bad and on off information about certain analyzer conditions They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices See Section 3 3 1 5 CONTROL INPUTS By applying 5VDC power supplied from an external source such as a PLC or Data logger See Section 3 3 1 6 Zero and Span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel 12 5 6 7 CC DATA BUS is a two wire clocked digital serial I O bus that is used widely in commercial and consumer electronic systems A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC 104 bus to The data is then fed to the keyboard display interface and finally on
113. APICOM s main interface which emulates the look and functionality of the instrument s actual front panel Figure 7 3 shows an example of APICOM being used to remotely configure the DAS feature 17 ApiComm Remote Interface Local Instrument Cone T T APICOM Graphical Interface 2 8 Ele Edt View Settings Help e 0JH GBs eh xe Figure 7 2 APICOM Remote Control Program Interface 07275B DCN6418 157 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Local Instrument at IDAS Configuration and Downloaded Data Corfiguration Get Config 2 AVG rx STABIL Set D D Records Send To Inst 360 Records Maximum Data CI SMPFLW SetO 0Records LosiConig Auto L SMPPRS nHgl AVG Set0 ORecerds C 02SLPC 200 Records Maximum Seve 7 0251 1 INST Set 0 0 Records 7 C20F51 X INST Set 0 C Records New Config 3DAS Channel Properties 0022351 3 INST Set 0 0 Records I DETAILED ATIMER 480 Records Maximum 0 02 1 X AVG Set 0 0 Records Lane Ep Settings SMPFRS inHg AVG Set 0 0 Recerds CI BOKTMP DeqC AVG Set0 0 Now Charna Channel Name C REFGND nV AVG Set D 0 Records I RFAO96 rV AVG Set 0 0 Recor
114. AS DATA CHANNEL NAMES SETUP X X NEXT SETUP X X SETUP X X Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 RS232 NAME CONC SET EDIT NAME CONC Press each button repeatedly to cycle through the available character set 0 9 A Z space amp 1 lt gt To edit the name of a DAS data channel follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting 2 7 1 4 2 EDITING DAS TRIGGERING EVENTS Triggering events define when and how the DAS records a measurement of any given data channel The most commonly used triggering events are ATIMER Sampling at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer Most trending information is usually stored at such regular intervals which can be instantaneous or averaged EXITZR EXITSP and O2SLPC exit zero exit span O slope change Sampling at the end of irregularly occurring calibrations or when the response slope changes These triggering events create instantaneous data points e g for the new slope and offset concentration response values at the end of a calibration Zero and slope values are valuable to monitor response drift and to document when the instrument was calibrated 07275B DCN6418 145 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Anal
115. ATED NO SET gt CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIN CALIBRATED NO SET CAL EXIT DIAG AIO CALIBRATING A D ZERO Y Firmware automatically performs a zero point calibration of the Motherboard s analog Inputs v IDIAG AIO CALIBRATING A D SPAN Y irmware automatically performs a span point calibration of the Motherboard s analog Inputs i Troubleshooting or call Teledyne Customer DIAG AIO A D CALIBRATION ERROR DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED YES EXIT EXIT DIAG AIO AIN CALIBRATED NO SET CAL EXIF 07275B DCN6418 107 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 8 ANALOG INPUTS XIN1 XIN8 OPTION CONFIGURATION To configure the analyzer s optional analog inputs define for each channel e gain number of units represented by 1 volt e Offset volts e engineering units to be represented in volts each press of the touchscreen button scrolls the list of alphanumeric characters from A Z and 0 9 e whether to display the channel in the Test functions To adjust settings for the Analog Inputs option parameters press DIAG ANALOG I CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO Press SET
116. Bi directional USB RS 232 and 10BaseT 100BaseT Ethernet ports for remote operation optional RS 485 e Front panel USB ports for peripheral devices e Digital status outputs to indicate instrument operating condition e Adaptive signal filtering to optimize response time e Internal data logging with 1 min to 365 day multiple average e Remote operation when used with Teledyne API s APICOM software e Temperature and Pressure Compensation e Ranges 0 1 to 0 100 0 user adjustable 07275B DCN6418 17 Introduction Features and Options Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual HAZARD Strong Oxidizer OXYGEN IS A STRONG OXIDIZER This is a general purpose instrument designed for usage in nonhazardous areas Ensure that all safety precautions related combustible gases are followed Before working with the casing open be sure to turn off power to the analyzer and perform air or gas purging of not only the analyzer inside but also the sample gas line In addition carefully prevent oil and grease from adhering to any tubing Otherwise poisoning fire or explosion may be caused due to gas leakage etc 1 3 OPTIONS Table 1 1 presents the options available with the T802 analyzer For assistance with ordering please contact the Sales department of Teledyne API at PHONE toll free 800 324 5190 North America FAX 858 657 9816 PHONE Direct 858 657 9800 E MAIL api sales
117. Block Diagram 12 5 7 1 LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD The LVDS low voltage differential signaling transmitter board converts the parallel display bus to a serialized low voltage differential signal bus in order to transmit the video signal to the LCD interface 12 5 7 2 FRONT PANEL TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY INTERFACE PCA The front panel touchscreen display interface PCA controls the various functions of the display and touchscreen For driving the display it provides connection between the CPU video controller and the LCD display module This PCA also contains e power supply circuitry for the LCD display module a USB hub that is used for communications with the touchscreen controller and the two front panel USB device ports e the circuitry for powering the display backlight 236 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Principles of Operation 12 5 8 SOFTWARE OPERATION The T802 Analyzer is at its heart a high performance VortexX86 based microcomputer running Windows CE Inside Windows CE special software developed by Teledyne API interprets user commands via the various interfaces performs procedures and tasks stores data in the CPU s various memory devices and calculates the concentration of the sample gas Windows CE API FIRMWARE Analyzer Operations Memory Handling Calibration Procedures DAS Records Configuration Procedures PC 104 BUS Calibration Data Sy
118. C 5VDC is Analog UN Relay PCA ouput Black wire Grey wire 22 awg 22 awg Motherboard Figure 12 8 Sensor Option PCA Layout and Electronic Connections 12 5 3 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT CPU The unit s CPU card is installed on the motherboard located inside the rear panel It is a low power 5 VDC 720mA max high performance Vortex 86SX based microcomputer running Windows CE Its operation and assembly conform to the PC 104 specification 228 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Principles of Operation CPU Disk on Module LVDS DOM transmitter board LEDs located on CPU below o LVDS transmitter board IDE active green ale Power active vy jo RS 485 COM J11 J15 USB PM a RS 232 only J2 COM2 J12 for LCD RS 232 or Screen RS 485 Figure 12 9 CPU Card The CPU includes two types of non volatile data storage an embedded 2MB flash chip and a Disk on Module DOM 12 5 3 1 DISK ON MODULE DOM The DOM is a 44 pin IDE flash disk with a storage capacity up to 128MB It is used to store the computer s operating system the Teledyne API firmware and most of the operational data generated by the analyzer s internal data acquisition system DAS Section 7 The LEDs on the DOM indicate power and reading writing to or from the DOM 12 5 4 RELAY BOARD The CPU issue
119. C7 0 1uF o tuF o 1uF O 1uF 0 1uF 1 ee 3o D 2 B CHI _ AN CH2 DU II 3 CH2 SHTDN 4 e CHB 9 e CH4 SDA AN CHS 5 6 cHs 7 7 CH6 0 8 CH7 AL 9 TA AO P IS0 GND u2 NC ANALOG INPUT i 6 NC REF REF AJ _ cs C9 5 2 NC 28 3 4 3 NC NC ci oe NC Ne 3 0 01 SMS12 SMS12 AGND DGND MAX1270BCAI 620 ni ni TP4 AGND AGND ISO GND ISO GND H 499 RIT 5480 CHASSIS B 499 RIS 4sy Iso 5480 TPS R4 mT TP6 IK C12 c3 cu Rene ike NC7WZ17P6X 0 1uF 222k 222k e 1 6 SDA SCL us TIA psi UE 1 Z 4 H vpn 4 ISO GND 2 T Spa spar E SDAI BT Ne D 8 4 ISO GND uj 5C NO Ee 3 4 oce Te sca GP seni 8 gt GND2 1 U4B a GND2 I NC7WZ17P6X ADuM2250 Title m GND Auxiliary I O Board ADC Size Number Revision DCN 6092 A 06731 PRINTED DOCUMENTS ARE UNCONTROLLED Date 5 6 2011 Sheet 3 of 3 File NPCBMGR 106731 3 ADC SchDoc Drawn By RT rey 07275B DCN6418
120. COMM VARS DIAG EXIT ENTER PASSWORD 818 SETUP 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG PREV NEXT SIGNAL VO Continue pressing NEXT until PRESSURE CALIBRATION ENTR PREV NEXT SAMPLE PRESS 29 12 IN HG A ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 07275B DCN6418 177 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual 9 4 2 FLOW CALIBRATION The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they are displayed on the front panel and reported through COM ports to match the actual flow rate measured at the sample inlet This does not change the hardware measurement of the flow sensors only the software calculated values To carry out this adjustment connect an external sufficiently accurate flow meter to the sample inlet Once the flow meter is attached and is measuring actual gas flow pres SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2zXXX XX TST gt SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS ACAL RANG PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG SIGNAL PREV NEXT C Continue pressing NEXT until FLOW C
121. CONTROL MENU SET EXIT SETUP XX 2 RANGE 1 20 00 0 2 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X 2 RANGE 2 100 00 1 0 0 39 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 5 4 4 SETUP gt RNGE gt DIL USING THE OPTIONAL DILUTION RATIO FEATURE This feature is a optional software utility that allows the user to compensate for any dilution of the sample gas that may occur before it enters the sample inlet Typically this occurs in continuous emission monitoring CEM applications where the sampling method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes the sample To set up and use the dilution ratio option 1 In the DIAG menu use the 929 password and navigate to Factory Options and enable the Dilution Ratio feature Press ENTER to save setting and then return to SETUP menu Select the reporting range mode and set the reporting range upper limit see Section 5 4 3 07275B DCN6418 77 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 3 Ensure that the upper span limit entered for the reporting range is the maximum expected concentration of the non diluted gas 4 Setthe dilution factor as a gain e g a value of 20 means 20 parts diluent and 1 part of sample gas SAMPLE RANGE 50 0 96 lt IST TST CAL SETUP
122. Description Units Value REMOTE CAL MODE O2 1 02 RANGE Range to calibrate during CO2 RANGE1 O2 RANGE 5 Contact closure and Hessen 4 calibration Enclose value in CO2 RANGE double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface RANGE2 PASS ENABLE OFF OFF ON ON enables passwords OFF disables them STABIL FREQ Seconds 10 1 300 Stability measurement sampling frequency STABIL SAMPLES Samples 25 2 40 Number of samples in concentration stability reading SERIAL NUMBER 00000000 Any character Unique serial number for inthe allowed instrument Enclose value in character set double quotes when setting Up to 100 from the RS 232 interface characters long DISP INTENSITY HIGH HIGH Front panel display intensity MED Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 LOW interface DIM I2C RESET ENABLE ON OFF ON bus automatic reset enable 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802 Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A Setup Variable Numeric Units Default Value Value Range Description CLOCK FORMAT 5 allowed character set Up to 100 characters long Time of day clock format flags Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface 96a Abbreviated weekday name 9b Abbreviated mo
123. E FLOW CALIBRATION CALIBRATION NONE SAMPLE Press ENTR Press ENTR PRESSURE to start to start SAMPLE FLOW Calibration Calibration O2CELL TEMP CO2 CELL TEMP BOX TEMP REC AUTO CALIBRATED CAL Auto Gal Manual Caf 10V CURR 0100 UP10 UP DOWN 0100 Figure A 7 Secondary Setup Menu DIAG 8 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Software Versions 1 0 3 T Series A 3 E Series Table A 1 Setup Variables Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Range Description Units Value Low Access Level Setup Variables 818 password DAS_HOLD_OFF Minutes 15 0 5 20 Duration of DAS hold off period STABIL GAS 02 023 Selects gas for stability CO2 measurement Enclose value in double quotes when setting from the RS 232 interface TPC ENABLE ON OFF ON ON enables temperature and pressure compensation OFF disables it DYN ZERO OFF OFF ON ON enables contact closure dynamic zero OFF disables it DYN SPAN OFF OFF ON ON enables contact closure dynamic span OFF disables it CONC PRECISION AUTO AUTO Number of digits to display to the 0 right of the decimal point for concentrations on the display 1 Enclose value in double quotes 2 when setting from the RS 232 interface 3 4 CLOCK ADJ Sec Day 0 60 60 Tim
124. ES HEX Print test s to screen name Print single test CLEAR ALL name hexmask Disable test s SET ALL name hexmask Display warning s W ID LIST ALL name hexmask NAMES HEX Print warning s name Clear single warning CLEAR ALL name hexmask Clear warning s ZERO LOWSPAN SPAN 1 2 Enter calibration mode ASEQ number Execute automatic sequence C ID COMPUTE ZERO SPAN Compute new slope offset EXIT Exit calibration mode ABORT Abort calibration sequence LIST Print all I O signals name value Examine or set I O signal LIST NAMES Print names of all diagnostic tests ENTER name Execute diagnostic test EXIT Exit diagnostic test D ID RESET DATA CONFIG exitcode Reset instrument PRINT name SCRIPT Print DAS configuration RECORDS name Print number of DAS records REPORT name RECORDS number FROM lt start sond daie VERBOSE COMPACTHEX e bas recors HH MM SS CANCEL Halt printing DAS records LIST Print setup variables name value warn low warn high Modify variable V ID name value Modify enumerated variable CONFIG Print instrument configuration MAINT ON OFF Enter exit maintenance mode MODE Print current instrument mode DASBEGIN lt data channel definitions gt DASEND Upload DAS configuration CHANNELBEGIN propertylist CHANNELEND Upload single DAS channel CHANNELDELETE Delete DAS channels The command syntax follows the command type separated by a space ch
125. Each status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and connected at Pin D Most PLCs have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will draw from an external device When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature an external dropping resistor must be used to limit the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA At 50 mA the transistor will drop approximately 1 2V from its collector to emitter The status outputs are accessed via a 12 pin connector on the analyzer s rear panel labeled STATUS see Figure 3 4 Pin outs for this connector are 36 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual STATUS 1 CONC VALID 2 3 A4 5 o 78 D 4 L CAL MODE SPAN CAL Optional CO CAL CAL MODE RANGE 2 Figure 3 9 Status Output Connector Table 3 6 Status Output Signals Rear rane Status Definition Condition Label 1 SYSTEM OK ON if no faults are present OFF any time the HOLD OFF feature is active such as during calibration or when 2 CONC VALID any faults exist invalidating the O measurement ON if concentration measurement is valid 3 CAL MODE ON whenever the instrument is being calibrated The Mode field 4 SPAN CAL ON whenever the instrument s SPAN point is being calibrated 5 RANGE
126. FF command e Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour even if the correct password is used If not logged on the only active command is the request for the help screen The following messages will be returned at logon LOGON SUCCESSFUL Correct password given LOGON FAILED Password not given or incorrect e LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL Connection terminated successfully To log on to the T802 analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled type LOGON 940331 Note 940331 is the default password To change the default password use the variable RS 232 PASS issued as follows V RS 232_PASS NNNNNN Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9 166 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual Remote Operation This page intentionally left blank 07275B DCN6418 167 07275B DCN6418 9 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Note This section contains a variety of information regarding the various methods for calibrating a T802 as well as other supporting information This section is organized as follows Section 9 1 Before Calibration This section contains general information you should know before calibrating the analyzer SECTION 9 2 Manual Calibration Checks and Calibration This section describes the procedure for checking the calibration of the T802 and calibrating the instrument Also included are instr
127. FF feature ON OFF EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting J gt HOLD OFF also prevents DAS measurements from being made at certain times when the quality of the analyzer s measurements may be suspect e g while the instrument is warming up In this case the length of time that the HOLD OFF feature is active is determined by the value of the internal variable VARS DAS HOLD OFF To set the length of the DAS HOLD OFF period see Section 11 1 3 154 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 7 1 4 9 THE COMPACT REPORT FEATURE When enabled this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS 232 reports Instead of reporting each parameter in one channel on a separate line up to five parameters are reported in one line The COMPACT DATA REPORT generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS front panel menu but is available via the instrument s communication ports by using APICOM or the analyzer s standard serial data protocol 7 1 4 10 THE STARTING DATE FEATURE This option allows specifying a starting date for any given channel when the user wants to start data acquisition only after a certain time and date If the STARTING DATE is in the past the default condition the DAS ignores this setting and begins recording data as defined by the REPORT PERIOD setting The STARTING DATE generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS fron
128. FFSET amp SLOPE If either the ZERO or SPAN ZERO SPANCONC EXIT values for the measurements buttons fail to appear see the Troubleshooting section for Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous TST TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT mem O2 M P CAL STABIL 0 00 0 00 O2 XXX XX STABIL 0 00 EXIT at this point gt ENTR CONC EXIT returns to the SAMPLE menu The sensor assembly itself does not have any serviceable parts and is enclosed in an insulated canister 60 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual SECTION II OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 07275B DCN6418 61 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank 62 07275B DCN6418 4 BASIC OPERATION The T802 analyzer is a computer controlled analyzer with a dynamic menu interface that allows all major operations to be controlled from the front panel touchscreen through these user friendly menus A complete set of menu trees is located in Appendix A of this manual This section includes Step by Step instructions for using the display touchscreen to set up and operate the analyzer s basic O measurement features and functional modes 4 1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES The T802 software has a variety of operating modes Most commonly the analyzer will be op
129. I PN 013500000 214 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Troubleshooting and Service 11 6 12 OPTIONAL CO SENSOR There are Two LEDs located on the sensor LED V8 LED Vo Serial vO Rod Green Sr CPU To CO Probe b ONS v Lj ovoce voc Tg suon2euuo5 Aiddng Figure 11 7 Location of Diagnostic LEDs on CO Sensor Normal Operation V8 is not lit V9 is Blinking Error State Both LEDs are blinking Check to make sure that the cable to the CO sensor is properly connected 11 7 REPAIR PROCEDURES rj This contains procedures that might need to be performed on rare occasions when major component of the analyzer requires repair or replacement 11 7 1 REPAIRING SAMPLE FLOW CONTROL ASSEMBLY e The critical flow orifice is housed in the flow control assembly Teledyne API PN 01760400 located on the top of the optical bench A sintered filter protects the jewel orifice so it is unusual for the orifice to need replacing but if it does or the filter needs replacement please use the following procedure see the Spare Parts list in Appendix B for PNs and kits 1 2 3 Turn off power to the analyzer Locate the assembly attached to the sample pump see Figure 3 5 Disconnect the pneumatic connection from the flow assembly and the assembly fr
130. ING SHIPMENTS FROM TELEDYNE API S TECHNICAL SUPPORT Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient generators of static electric charges To prevent damage from ESD Teledyne API ships all electronic components and assemblies in properly sealed ant ESD containers Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti ESD container during shipping as the packing materials vibrate and rub against each other To prevent these static charges from damaging the components or assemblies being shipped make sure that you Always unpack shipments from Teledyne API Technical Support by 07275B DCN6418 245 A Primer Electro Static Discharge Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 1 Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti ESD work area 2 Carry the still sealed ant ESD bag tube or bin to the anti ESD work area 3 Follow steps 6 and 7 of Opening Shipments from Teledyne API s Technical Support above when opening the anti ESD container at the work station 4 Reserve the anti ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components or assemblies to be returned to Teledyne API 13 4 2 5 PACKING COMPONENTS FOR RETURN TO TELEDYNE API TECHNICAL SUPPORT Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne API Technical Support in anti ESD bins tubes or bags CAUTION ESD HAZARD DO NOT use pink poly bags NEVER allow any s
131. If CO option is present The Alarm 2 Relay will be turned on any time the concentration set point is exceeded amp will return to its normal state when the concentration value goes back below the concentration set point Even though the relay on the rear panel is a NON Latching alarm amp resets when the concentration goes back below the alarm set point the warning on the front panel of the instrument will remain latched until it is cleared You can clear the warning on the front panel by either pushing the CLR button on the front panel or through the serial port The software for this instrument is flexible enough to allow you to configure the alarms so that you can have 2 alarm levels for each gas Alarm 1 20 O Alarm 2 100 CO Alarm 1 20 96 CO Alarm 2 100 07275B DCN6418 39 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual In this example Alarm 1 amp CO Alarm 1 will both be associated with the Alarm 2 relay on the rear panel This allows you to have multiple alarm levels for individual gases A more likely configuration for this would be to put one gas on the Alarm 1 relay amp the other gas on the Alarm 2 relay Alarm 1 20 Alarm 2 Disabled CO Alarm 1 Disabled CO Alarm 2 80 ALARM 4 RELAY This relay is connected to the range bit If the instrument is configured for Auto Range amp the instr
132. K Analyzer display continues to cycle through all of the available gas measurements throughout this procedure Wait until STABIL falls below 0 01 This may take several minutes Note SAMPLE TST TST gt RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX SETUP Toggle TST gt button until y SAMPLE lt TST TST STABIL 100 00 gt CAL O2 XXX XX SETUP Y zero gas to ent at the rear of the analyzer iter the SAMPLE E C Record O zero point readings y um span gas to enter the SAMPLE at the rear of the analyzer Y Record span point readings Setthe Display to show the STABIL test function This function calculates the stability of the measurement Wait until STABIL falls below 0 01 This may take several minutes The ZERO and or SPAN keys will appear at various points of this process It is not necessary to press them If the ZERO or SPAN menu buttons are not displayed the measurement made during this cal check is out of the allowable range allowed for a reliable calibration See Section 11 for troubleshooting tips 07275B DCN6418 173 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual 9 2 3 PERFORMING A BASIC MANUAL CALIBRATION The following section describes the basic method for manually calibratin
133. LIFTING CARRYING THE ANALYZER ALSO DISCONNECT ALL CABLES AND TUBING FROM THE ANALYZER BEFORE MOVING IT Analog Inputs w USB port Used for connecting external voltage signals from other instrumentation such as meteorological instruments 64B Also can be used for logging these signals in the analyzer s internal Sections 3 3 1 2 DAS See Option 64A for USB port only and 5 9 8 Current Loop Analog Outputs Adds isolated voltage to current conversion circuitry to the analyzer s analog outputs Can be configured for 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA 41 May be ordered separately for any of the analog outputs Section 3 3 1 4 Can be installed at the factory or retrofitted in the field Parts Kits Spare parts and expendables Expendables Kit for analyzer with a pump includes a recommended 42A set of expendables for one year of operation Appendix B 42D Expendables Kit for analyzer without a pump includes a Appendix B recommended set of expendables for one year of operation Communication Cables For remote serial network and Internet communication with the analyzer Type Description Shielded straight through DB 9F to DB 25M cable about 60A RS 232 1 8 m long Used to interface with older computers code activated switches with DB 25 serial connectors Shielded straight through DB 9F to DB 9F cable of about 60B RS 232 1 8 m length Sections 3 3 1 8 and 6 Ethernet Patch cable 2 mete
134. LLOW 001763500 ASSY FLOW CTL 110CC 1 4 ELBOW B 003290000 THERMISTOR BASIC VENDOR ASSY KB 009690200 AKIT TFE FLTR ELEM FL19 100 1 47mm 009690300 AKIT TFE FLTR ELEM FL19 30 1 47mm 016290000 WINDOW SAMPLE FILTER 47MM KB 016300800 ASSY SAMPLE FILTER 47MM ANG BKT 1UM 037860000 ORING TEFLON RETAINING RING 47MM KB 040010000 ASSY FAN REAR PANEL B F 040030100 PRESS SENSORS 1X w FM4 042410500 ASSY PUMP INT 043420000 ASSY HEATER THERM O2 SEN 045230200 PCA RELAY CARD 055100200 ASSY OPTION PUMP 240V 058021100 PCA MOTHERBD GEN 5 ICOP 066970000 INTRF LCD TOUCH SCRN F P 067240000 CPU PC 104 VSX 6154E ICOP KB 067300000 PCA AUX I O BD ETHERNET ANALOG amp USB 067300100 PCA AUX I O BOARD ETHERNET 067300200 PCA AUX I O BOARD ETHERNET amp USB 067900000 LCD MODULE W TOUCHSCREEN KB 068810000 PCA LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD 069500000 PCA SERIAL amp VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD 072150000 ASSY TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL MODULE 072740000 MANUAL T801 OPERATORS 072750000 MANUAL T802 OPERATORS 072760000 MANUAL T803 OPERATORS 073770100 DOM w SOFTWARE STD T801 073780100 DOM w SOFTWARE STD T802 073790100 DOM w SOFTWARE STD T803 CN0000073 POWER ENTRY 120 60 KB CN0000458 PLUG 12 MC 1 5 12 ST 3 81 KB CN0000520 PLUG 10 MC 1 5 10 ST 3 81 KB 10000001 FILTER SS KB FM0000004 FLOWMETER KB HE0000017 HTR 12W 120V 50W 240V CE AP KB HW0000005 FOOT HW0000020 SPRING HW0000036
135. LT ADAPT ON ON OFF ON enables Oz adaptive filter OFF disables it O2 FILT SIZE Samples 60 1 500 Oz moving average filter size in normal mode O2 FILT ASIZE Samples 10 1 500 moving average filter size in adaptive mode O2 FILT DELTA 96 2 0 1 100 Absolute change in concentration to shorten filter O2 FILT PCT 96 2 0 1 100 Relative change in O2 concentration to shorten filter O2 DELAY Seconds 20 0 300 Delay before leaving adaptive filter mode O2 DIL FACTOR 1 0 1 1000 Dilution factor for O2 Used only if is dilution enabled with FACTORY_OPT variable O2 CELL SET 50 30 70 sensor cell temperature set point and warning limits Warnings 45 55 O2 CELL CYCLE Seconds 10 0 5 30 cell temperature control cycle period O2 CELL PROP 1 0 10 cell PID temperature control proportional coefficient O2 CELL INTEG 0 1 0 10 cell PID temperature control integral coefficient O2 CELL DERIV 0 disabled 0 10 cell PID temperature control derivative coefficient O2 STD CELL TEMP K 323 1 500 Standard cell temperature for temperature compensation O2 STD CELL PRESS Hg 28 50 1 00 50 00 Standard cell pressure for pressure compensation CO2 DWELL Seconds 1 0 1 30 Dwell time before taking each sample CO2 FILT ADAPT ON ON OFF ON enables CO adaptive filter OFF disables it CO2 FILT SIZE Samples 48 1 300 CO moving average filter size in normal mode
136. NTATION TAPI Safety Messages Warranty About This Manual Table of Contents 1 INTRODUCTION FEATURES AND OPTIONS 1 1 T802 Overview 1 2 Features 1 3 Options 2 SPECIFICATIONS APPROVALS amp COMPLIANC 2 1 Specifications 5 2 2 Approvals and Certification 2 2 1 Safety 2 2 2 EMC 2 2 3 Other Type Certifications 3 GETTING STARTED 3 1 Unpacking the T802 Analyzer 3 1 1 Ventilation Clearance 3 2 Instrument Layou 3 2 1 Front Panel 3 3 Connections and Setup 3 3 1 Electrical Connections 3 3 2 Pneumatic Connections 3 4 Startup Functional Checks and Initial Calibration 3 4 1 Startup 3 4 2 Functional Checks 3 4 3 Initial Calibration 4 BASIC OPERATION 4 1 Overview of Operating Modes 4 2 Sample Mode 4 3 Calibration Mode 4 4 Setup Mode 4 4 1 Primary Setup Menu 4 4 2 Secondary Setup Menu 5 SETUP MENU 69 5 1 SETUP gt CFG Configuration Information 5 2 SETUP gt ACAL NOT USED 5 3 SETUP gt DAS Internal Data Acqui 5 4 SETUP gt RNGE Analog Output Reporting Range Configuratio 5 4 1 Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting Ranges 5 4 2 Analog Output Ranges for Concentratioi 5 4 3 Reporting Range Modes 5 4 4 SETUP gt RNGE gt DIL Using the Optional Dilution Ratio Feature 5 5 SETUP gt PASS Password Feature 5 6 SETUP gt CLK Setting the T802 Analyzer s Internal Clocl 5 6 1 Setting the Inte
137. NTR EXIT returns to the Press the button for previous Functio the desired MODE SETUP X PRECISION 2 NU dd ENTR EXIT Toggle to set from 4 NT STOR NUM SAMPLE OFF EDIT SETUP XX lt to4 lt STOR NUM SAMPLE OFF ENTR EXIT Toggle to turn ON gt OFF 148 072758 DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Note When the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature is turned on the instrument will store the number of measurements that were used to compute the AVG SDEV MIN or MAX value but not the actual measurements 7 1 4 4 EDITING SAMPLE PERIOD AND REPORT PERIOD The DAS defines two principal time periods by which sample readings are taken and permanently recorded SAMPLE PERIOD Determines how often DAS temporarily records a sample reading of the parameter in volatile memory SAMPLE PERIOD is only used when the DAS parameter s sample mode is set for AVG SDEV MIN or MAX The SAMPLE PERIOD is set to one minute by default and generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS front panel menu but is available via the instrument s communication ports by using APICOM or the analyzer s standard serial data protocol REPORT PERIOD Sets how often the sample readings stored in volatile memory are processed e g average minimum or maximum are calculated the results stored permanently in the instrument s Disk on Modul
138. OST NAME addressed from other computers on the LAN or via the Internet To change see Section 6 3 2 1 1 Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Technical Support personnel Note If the gateway IP instrument IP and the subnet mask are all zeroes e g 0 0 0 0 the DCHP was not successful in which case you may have to configure the analyzer s Ethernet properties manually See your network administrator 07275B DCN6418 119 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual To view the above properties listed in Table 6 3 press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 PRIMARY SETUP MENU ACAL PASS CLK MORE EX SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DV EX SETUP XX COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM EXIT SETUP ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP XX DHGP ON lt SET SEP EDI seruPXx _INSTIP 00 00 SET EDITis disabled BETUPXX GATEWAY 1P 0 0 00 when DHCP lt sep isON SETUP XX SUBNET MASK 1P 0 0 0 0 SED SETUP xx CF PORTT3000 gt DO NOT alter unless lt SET gt
139. Once the limit is exceeded the oldest data is 100 by available storage RECORDS 5 over written space Enables the analyzer to automatically report R amp 232 REPORT channel values to the RS 232 ports OFF OFF or ON CHANNEL Enables or disables the channel Allows a channel ENABLED to be temporarily turned off without deleting it OFF or ON Disables sampling of data parameters while CAL HOLD OFF instrument is in calibration mode gr ON More with APICOM but only the first six are displayed on the front panel For information regarding the maximum number of channels parameters and records and how to calculate the file size for each data channel refer to the DAS manual downloadable from the TAPI website at http Avww teledyne api com manuals under Special Manuals 3 When enabled records are not recorded until the DAS HOLDOFF period is passed after calibration mode DAS HOLDOFF SET in the VARS menu see Section 5 8 7 1 2 DEFAULT DAS CHANNELS CONC Samples O concentration at one minute intervals and stores an average every hour with a time and date stamp Readings during calibration and calibration HOLD OFF are not included in the data By default the last 800 hourly averages are stored PNUMTC Collects sample flow and sample pressure data at five minute intervals and stores an average once a day with a time and date stamp This data is useful for monitoring the condition of the pump and crit
140. REV NEXT JUMP OFF PRNT EXI On status signals this Pressing PRNT will send a formatted button toggles the printout to the serial port and can be signal ON OFF gt captured with a computer or other output device Figure 11 2 Example of Signal I O Function The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory Note Any I O signals changed while in the signal menu will remain in effect ONLY until signal I O menu is exited The Analyzer regains control of these signals upon exit 07275B DCN6418 201 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 11 2 USING THE INTERNAL ELECTRONIC STATUS LEDS Several LEDs are located inside the instrument to assist in determining if the analyzer s CPU bus and relay board are functioning properly 11 2 1 CPU STATUS INDICATOR DSS a red LED that is located on upper portion of the motherboard just to the right of the CPU board flashes when the CPU is running the main program loop After power up approximately 30 to 60 seconds DSS should flash on and off If characters are written to the front panel display but DSS does not flash then the program files have become corrupted If after 30 60 seconds neither the 055 is flashing or no characters have been written to the front panel display then the CPU is bad and must be replaced CPU Status LED Figure 11 3 Status Indicator 1
141. Range mode the instrument reports the same data in the same range on both the A1 and A2 outputs and automatically switches both outputs between ranges as described above Also the RANGE test function displayed on the front panel will be replaced by two separate functions e 02 RNG1 The LOW range setting for all analog outputs e O2 RNG2 The HIGH range setting for all analog outputs The high low range status is also reported through the external digital status bits See Section 3 3 1 5 To set individual ranges press the following keystroke sequence 76 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Avoid accidentally setting the O2 RANGE 1 LOW of the instrument with a higher span limit than the O2 RANGE 2 HIGH This will cause the unitto stay in the low reporting range perpetually and defeat the function of the AUTO range mode The LOW and HIGH ranges have separate slopes and offsets for computing the O2 concentration The two ranges must be independently calibrated Toggle to select the upper SPAN limit for the reporting range RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK SETUP X X RANGE CONTROL MENU MODE SET SETUP RANGE MODE SNGL SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP RANGE MODE AUTO SNGL DUAL AUTO ENTR EXIT SETUP X X RANGE
142. S 1 axi MUST BE WITHIN 29 12 OF THE m REGULATOR LE Jo 35V TANTALUM NPUTOUTPUT PNS Eim THERMISTER vee ag xn D OR Mp s CTEMPMUX gt m 7 s mi 1 T kRsTER i e THERMISTERS MS oe 3 MIR THERMISTERS i THERMISTERE 8 m THERMISTERT 44 Noa THERMISTERS 1 WO om muenusrens 9 THERMISTER7 lo THERMESTERS a THERMISTERS d a 12 THERMISTERA Mm dure es THERMISTER3 RS0000287 1 DIOK 1 QIOK 1 Q 10K 1 1 Q TOK 1 1 2 10K 1 m THERMISTER2 Td m s 2 E E ND 20 CH canis ANI ks Schema tor E Series GS Motherboard PCA PN 05802 Nui BER B nac raum ai ur Y Eric S Sa z 3 s 07275B DCN6418 D 11
143. Section 5 4 2 e third output is only active if the analyzer is equipped with the optional CO e fourth output A4 outputs a signal that can be set to represent the current value of one of several test functions see Table 5 8 5 9 3 ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION The following lists the analog I O functions that are available in the T802 analyzer Table 5 4 DIAG Analog I O Functions SUB MENU FUNCTION Initiates a calibration of the A1 A2 A3 and A4 analog output channels that determines AOUT the slope and offset inherent in the circuitry of each output CALIBRATED These values are stored in the memory and applied to the output signals by the CPU automatically Sets the basic electronic configuration of the A1 output O2 Concentration There are four options RANGE Selects the signal type voltage or current loop and level of the output CONC OUT 1 REC OFS Allows them input of a DC offset to let the user manually adjust the output level AUTO CAL Enables Disables the AOUT CALIBRATION Feature CALIBRATED Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED but on this one channel only e Same as for CONC OUT 1 but for analog channel A2 but only if Auto or Dual CONC OUT 2 range is selected Oxygen high range RNG2 e Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel but only if the optional CO2 CONC OUT 3 sensor is installed TEST OUTPUT Same as for CONC OUT 1 but for
144. T Selects the next data channel or parameter SETUP XX NAME CONG SET Selects the previous property to be edited SET EDIT EXIT SET Selects the next property to be edited INS Inserts a new data channel or parameter into the list BEFORE the selected channel y DEL Deletes the currently selected data channel or Continue pressing lt SET or SET gt until parameter EDIT Enters EDIT mode Exports the configuration of all data channels to the PRINT 5 232 interface PARAMETER 2 Buttons only appear when applicable SET SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP XX EDIT PARAMS DELETE DATA YES deletes all data YES NO NO retains the currently stored for data and this data channel and returns to the continues into EDIT mode SETUP XX PARAM O2CNC1 MODE AVG previous menu EXIT discards the new lt SET EDIT 5 JP X X PRECISION 2 PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT c setting Toggle to select a ENTR accepts the different parameter T Y new setting JF LLL ISETUPX X PARAMETER O2CNC1 SET EDIT EXIT SETUP PARAMETER O2CNC1 PREV NEXT ENTR Toggle these buttons to r cycle through the list of y available parameters SETUPXX SAMPLE MODEAVG lt SET EDIT EXIT SETUPXX SAMPLE MODE AVG Pressing lt SET INST AVG SDEV MIN MAX E
145. TE information 5 8 SETUP gt MORE gt VARS INTERNAL VARIABLES VARS The T802 has several user adjustable software variables which define certain operational parameters Usually these variables are automatically set by the instrument s firmware but can be manually redefined through the VARS menu The following table lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level See Appendix A2 for a detailed listing of all of the T802 variables that are accessible through the remote interface 07275B DCN6418 85 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Table 5 2 Variable Names VARS VARS NO VARIABLE DESCRIPTION ALLOWED Default SETTINGS settings cuerdas ne internal Data Acquisition System DAS HOLD May be set for 1 3 A intervals 0 DAS HOLD OFF No data are stored in the DAS channels during situations between 15 min when the software considers the data to be questionable 0 5 20 min such as during warm up or just after the instrument returns from one of its calibration modes to SAMPLE Mode 1 Selects which gas measurement is displayed when the 1 STABIL GAS STABIL test function is selected 05 CO2 02 NOTE It is strongly recommended that this variable NOT be changed TPC ENABLE ON OFF 2 ON enables OFF disables temperature and pressure on compensation 3 DYN ZERO Automatically adjusts offse
146. TFE TAPE 1 4 48 FT ROLL HW0000101 ISOLATOR HW0000453 SUPPORT CIRCUIT BD 3 16 HW0000685 LATCH MAGNETIC FRONT PANEL KITO00219 AKIT 4 20MA CURRENT OUTPUT KITO00253 ASSY amp TEST SPARE PS37 KITO00254 ASSY amp TEST SPARE PS38 OP0000030 OXYGEN TRANSDUCER PARAMAGNETIC 07275B DCN6418 080000001 080000094 PU0000022 810000015 SW0000006 SW0000025 SW0000059 WRO0000008 B4 T80X Spare Parts List Ref 072690000A DCN6431 2012 April 12 ORING 2 006VT KB ORING 2 228V 50 DURO VITON KB REBUILD KIT FOR PU20 amp 04241 KB RELAY DPDT KB SWITCH THERMAL 60 C KB SWITCH POWER CIRC BREAK VDE CE KB PRESSURE SENSOR 0 15 PSIA ALL SEN POWER CORD 10A KB 07275B DCN6418 802 Expendables Kit PN06535A DCN5390 802 without a pump Expendables Kit Part Number Description 006190600 AKIT EXP 802E W O PUMP 1UM This kit contains the following items labor incl 1009690300 FLTR ELEMENT 47MM 1UM 30 FL0000001 FILTER SS HW0000020 SPRING OR0000001 ORING SAMPLE FLOW M802E with a pump Expendables Kit Part Number Description 006190500 AKIT EXP 802E W PUMP 1UM This kit contains the following items labor incl 1009690300 FLTR ELEMENT 47MM 1UM 30 FL0000001 FILTER SS HW0000020 SPRING NOTEO1 23 SERVICE NOTE HOW TO REBUILD KNF PUMP OR0000001 ORING SAMPLE FLOW PU0000022 REBUILD KIT FOR
147. Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Term Description Definition DAC Digital to Analog Converter DAS Data Acquisition System DCE Data Communication Equipment DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol protocol used by LAN or Internet servers to automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected to the network DIAG Diagnostics the diagnostic settings of the analyzer DOM Disk On Module a 44 pin IDE flash drive with up to 128MB storage capacity for instrument s firmware configuration settings and data DOS Disk Operating System DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory DR DOS Digital Research DOS DTE Data Terminal Equipment EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory also referred to as a FLASH chip or drive ESD Electro Static Discharge ETEST Electrical Test Ethernet a standardized IEEE 802 3 computer networking technology for local area networks LANs facilitating communication and sharing resources FEP Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon Flash non volatile solid state memory FPI Fabry Perot Interferometer a special light filter typically made of a transparent plate with two reflecting surfaces or two parallel highly reflective mirrors bus a clocked bi directional serial bus for communication between individ
148. The default setting for this feature is AT YO amp 00 amp amp 10 50 2 amp 0 amp N6 amp MO E0 Q1 amp WO This string can be altered to match your modem s initialization and can be up to 100 characters long To change this setting press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXXXX SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SLK MORE EXIT SETUP XX COMM VARS DIAG SET SET EDIT COM MODE 0 EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU EXIT Y Continue pressing lt SET or SET gt until 5 INET COMI COMMUNICATIONS MENU come lt SET SET gt EDIT PORT YO amp DO amp 810 EXIT COM PORT INIT AT YO amp DO amp H 810 INS DEL A ENTR EXI EXIT discards the new setting CH CH lt CH move the cursor left and right along the text string ae ENTR accepts the new setting INS and CH gt inserts new character before the cursor position The DEL deletes character at the cursor position Case 96 amp e Numerals Toggle to scroll through the available Alpha A Z Upper and Lower e Special Characters space character set TRI 0 9 The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 164 07275B DCN6418 Teledy
149. The most common example of triboelectric charging happens when someone wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet or linoleum tiled floor With each step electrons change places and the resulting electro static charge builds up quickly reaching significant levels Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a workbench using a plastic handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of Styrofoam pellets during shipment can also build hefty static charges 07275B DCN6418 239 A Primer on Electro Static Discharge Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Table 13 1 Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities MEANS OF GENERATION 65 90 RH 10 25 RH Walking across nylon carpet 1 500V 35 000V Walking across vinyl tile 250V 12 000V Worker at bench 100V 6 000V Poly bag picked up from bench 1 200V 20 000V Moving around in a chair padded with urethane foam 1 500V 18 000V 13 2 HOW ELECTRO STATIC CHARGES CAUSE DAMAGE Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an electronic device Current flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of the device and the typically very high voltage levels of the charge overheat the delicate traces of the integrated circuits melting them or even vaporizing parts of them When examined by microscope the damage caused by electro static discharge looks a lot like tiny bomb craters
150. X y REPORTED ON ENTR 27 EXIT sets the Gas type to NONE EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 07275B DCN6418 133 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 6 5 2 7 DELETING HESSEN GAS LIST ENTRIES To delete an entry from the Hessen Gas list press RANGE 100 00 SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS PASS CLK MORE EXIT ISETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG COMMUNICATIONS MENU 10 HESN COM1 2 HESSEN VARIATION TYPE1 SET SET EDIT C Continue pressing NEXT until HESSEN GAS LIST SET SET EDIT SETUP X X O2 1 110 REPORTED PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X DELETE YES NO The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 134 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual 6 5 2 8 SETTING HESSEN PROTOCOL STATUS FLAGS Teledyne API s implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that the instrument includes in responses to inform the host computer of its condition Each bit can be assigned to one operational and warning message flag The default settings for these bit flags are Table 6 6 Default He
151. X ON DAS RNGE PASS CLK PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE PASSWORD ENABLE OFF ENTR EXIT PASSWORD ENABLE ON EXIT discards the new setting ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting 77 07275B DCN6418 79 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Example If all passwords are enabled the following keypad sequence would be required to enter the SETUP menu RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX SETUP Press individual buttons to set number EXAMPLE This password enables the ENTR EXIT SETUP mode Note When PASSWORD ENABLE is set to OFF the instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG menus but it displays the default password 818 Press ENTR to continue 80 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 6 SETUP gt CLK SETTING THE T802 ANALYZER S INTERNAL CLOCK The analyzer has an internal clock for setting the time and day it s speed can be adjusted to compensate for faster or slower CPU clocks Press SETUP gt CLK to access the clock 5 6 1 SETTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK S TIME AND DAY The T802 has a time of day clock that supports the time of day TEST function the time stamps for the DAS feature and most COM port messages To set the clock s time and day press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX T TST L SETUP SETUP
152. X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X TIME OF DAY CLOCK TIME DATE SETUP X X 0 1 OCT DATE 01 OCT 09 ENTR EXIT 9 ENTR EXIT oggle these buttons to change day month and or Toggle these MINUTE buttons to enter DAY MONTH YEAR current hour HOUR TIME 22 30 SETUP X X 1 5 OCT DATE 15 OCT 09 ENTR EXIT 9 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X TIME OF DAY CLOCK EXIT returns to TIME DATE SETUP X X display gt The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 07275B DCN6418 81 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 6 2 ADJUSTING THE INTERNAL CLOCK S SPEED In order to compensate for CPU clocks that run faster or slower you can adjust a variable called CLOCK_ADJ to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day The CLOCK ADJUST variable is accessed via the VARS submenu To change the value of this variable press RANGE 100 00 SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP XX ENTER SETUP PASS 0 8 1 8 ENTR SETUP X X 0 DAS_HOLD_OFF 15 0 Minutes PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until SETUP X X 4 CLOCK_ADJUST 0 Sec Day PREV NEXT EDIT ENTR EXIT SETUP X X
153. accidental contact with those sockets that are not populated see Figure 12 11 Never remove this retainer while the instrument is plugged in and turned on The contacts of the AC relay sockets beneath the shield carry high AC voltages even when no relays are present 230 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Principles of Operation Retainer Mounting Screws AC Relay Retainer Plate Figure 12 11 Relay PCA with AC Relay Retainer in Place 12 5 4 1 STATUS LEDS LEDs located on the Analyzer s relay PCA show the current status of various control functions performed by the relay PCA The three that are used in the T802 are described in Table 12 1 and their locations are illustrated in Figure 12 12 Table 12 1 Relay PCA Status LEDs LED Color Function State DA Red Watchdog Circuit CPU D2 D4 SPARE 05 Yellow Sensor Cell heater Heating Not Heating D6 Yellow Sensor heater Heating Not Heating 09 210 011 16 1 Only active when the optional CO sensor is installed Not Used 07275B DCN6418 231 Principles of Operation Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual D6 Yellow O2 Sensor Heater D5 Yellow Sensor Heater only with CO option
154. aceable voltage source or meter e Data recording devices should be capable of bi polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded For electronic data recording the T802 provides an internal data acquisition system DAS which is described in detail in Section 7 APICOM a remote control program is also provided as a convenient and powerful tool for data handling download storage quick check and plotting see Section 8 1 1 9 2 MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECKS AND CALIBRATION IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA ZERO SPAN CALIBRATION CHECKS VS ZERO SPAN CALIBRATION Pressing the ENTR button during the following procedure resets the stored values for OFFSET and SLOPE and alters the instrument s Calibration This should ONLY BE DONE during an actual calibration of the T802 NEVER press the ENTR button if you are only checking calibration 9 2 1 SETUP FOR BASIC CALIBRATION CHECKS AND CALIBRATION Enclosure Wall Figure 9 1 100 Concentration Connect the Sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown below Source of VENT here input SAMPLE GAS Removed during calibra Manual Control Valve Calibrated at 20 9 Span Concentration Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Bottled Span Gas 172 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual Calibration Procedures 9 2 2 PERFORMING A BASIC MANUAL CALIBRATION CHEC
155. act the CPU is faulty if on power on the watchdog LED on the motherboard is not flashing In some rare circumstances this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard specifically U57 the large 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board If this is true removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to start up but the measurements will be invalid If the analyzer stops during initialization the front panel display shows a fault or warning message it is likely that the DOM the firmware or the configuration and data files have been corrupted 07275B DCN6418 213 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 11 6 11 RS 232 COMMUNICATIONS 11 6 11 1 GENERAL RS 232 TROUBLESHOOTING Teledyne API analyzers use the RS 232 communications protocol to allow the instrument to be connected to a variety of computer based equipment RS 232 has been used for many years and as equipment has become more advanced connections between various types of hardware have become increasingly difficult Generally every manufacturer observes the signal and timing requirements of the protocol very carefully Problems with RS 232 connections usually center around four general areas 1 Incorrect cabling and connectors See Section 3 3 1 8 for connector and pin out information 2 The BAUD rate and protocol are incorrectly configured See Section 6 2 2 3 If a modem is
156. ad Write Definition In the Read Write Definition window see example that follows select a Function what you wish to read from the analyzer b Input Quantity based on your firmware s register map Inthe View section of the Read Write Definition window select a Display typically Float Inverse 4 Click OK 2 Next click Connection Connect In the Connection Setup window see example that follows select the options based on your computer Press OK Read the MODBUS Poll Register Use the Register Map to find the test parameter names for the values displayed see example that follows If desired assign an alias for each 126 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Analyzer Operation Manual Example Read Write Definition windoy Read Write Definition 04 Read Input Registers 34 4 52 ScanRae 1000 v Read Wiie Enabled View Rows OG Ox Columns Cl Address in Cell Display Float inverse v CIPLC Addresses Base 1 Example Connection Setup windo Connection Setup Connection Pott 4 Mode Oasu 115200 Baud Response Timeout 8Databis 1000 None Party Delay Between Polls 100 iStpBi Remote Server Example MODBUS Poll window Modbus Poll NbpolH Edt Cornecton Setup Functions Dstley View Window Help amp SS 1 05 06 16 16 22 23 p 4103 Fr
157. analog channel A4 TEST CHANNEL AIN Initiates a calibration of the A to D Converter circuit located on the Motherboard CALIBRATED XIN1 For each of 8 external analog inputs channels shows the gain offset engineering units and whether the channel is to show up as a Test function XIN8 T Any changes made to RANGE or REC OFS require recalibration of this output 07275B DCN6418 91 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Toggle these buttons to enter the correct PASSWORD To access the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION sub menu press RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX SETUP ISETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CLK MORE EXIT ACAL DAS ISETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU DIAG EXIT a SETUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 ENTR EXIT DIAG SIGNAL NEXT ENTR EXI C Continue pressing NEXT until 0 Configuration Submenu i IDIAG ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET CAL DIAG AIO CONC OUT 3 5V OVR CAL Adjusts the signal output for Analog Output A1 DIAG AIO CONC OUT 1 5V OVR CAL SET SET EDIT EX 3 DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V OVR CAL SET SET EDIT EXT Adjusts the signal output for Analog Output A2 ET SET EDIT EXITM for Ana
158. and span responses change over time e These channels also store the STABIL value standard deviation of O2 concentration to evaluate if the analyzer response has properly leveled off during the calibration procedure If your instrument has a CO sensor option installed this should be calibrated as well 9 4 CALIBRATION OF THE T802 S ELECTRONIC SUBSYSTEMS 9 4 1 PRESSURE CALIBRATION A sensor at the exit of the sample chamber continuously measures the pressure of the sample gas This data is used to compensate the final O concentration calculation for changes in atmospheric pressure and is stored in the CPU s memory as the test function PRES also viewable via the front panel 176 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual Calibration Procedures Toggle to match the current ambient atmospheric pressure To carry out this adjustment the current ambient atmospheric pressure must be known Before performing the following pressure calibration ensure that the pressure being measured by the analyzer s internal sensor is equal to ambient atmospheric pressure by disconnecting e The sample gas pump and The sample gas line vent from the sample gas inlet on the instrument s rear panel To cause the analyzer to measure and record a value for PRES press SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS ACAL RANG PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU
159. aracter Strings in brackets are optional designators The following key assignments also apply 07275B DCN6418 A 27 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Table A 8 Terminal Key Assignments TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS ESC Abort line CR ENTER Execute command Ctrl C Switch to computer mode COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS LF line feed Execute command Ctrl T Switch to terminal mode A 28 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A APPENDIX A 7 MODBUS Register Map Software Versions 1 0 3 T Series A 3 E Series MODBUS Register Description Units Address dec 0 based MODBUS Floating Point Input Registers 32 bit IEEE 754 format read in high word low word order read only slope for range 1 2 slope for range 2 ar offset for range 1 6 offset for range 2 8 concentration for range 1 during zero span calibration just 96 before computing new slope and offset 109 concentration for range 2 during zero span calibration just 96 before computing new slope and offset 12 concentration for range 1 96 14 concentration for range 2 96 164 sensor cell temperature 18 sensor cell temperature contro
160. aramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 2 2 APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS 2 2 1 SAFETY 2 2 2 EMC The Teledyne API Model T802 Paramagnet Oxygen Analyzer was tested and certified for Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC This section presents the compliance statements for those requirements and directives IEC 61010 1 2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use CE 2006 95 EC Low Voltage Directive North American cNEMKO Canada CAN CSA C22 2 No 61010 1 04 NEMKO CCL US UL No 61010 1 2nd Edition EN 61326 1 IEC 61326 1 Class A Emissions Industrial Immunity EN 55011 CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A Emissions FCC 47 CFR Part 15B Class A Emissions CE 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2 2 3 OTHER TYPE CERTIFICATIONS For additional certifications please contact Technical Support Toll free Phone 800 324 5190 Phone 858 657 9800 Fax 858 657 9816 Email sda_techsupport teledyne com 22 07275B DCN6418 3 GETTING STARTED This section addresses the procedures for unpacking the instrument and inspecting for damage presents clearance specifications for proper ventilation introduces the instrument layout then presents the procedures for getting started making electrical and pneumatic connections and conducting an initia calibration check 3 1 UNPACKING THE T802 ANALYZER CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD To avoid
161. are to be performed by the customer NON TAPI MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT PRODUCT RETURN Failure to comply with proper anti Electro Static Discharge ESD handling and packing instructions may void your warranty For anti ESD handling and packing instructions please refer to Packing Equipment provided but not manufactured by TAPI is warranted and will be repaired to the extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment manufacturer s warranty units or components returned to Teledyne API should be properly packed for handling and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center After the repair the equipment will be returned freight prepaid The complete Terms and Conditions of Sale can be reviewed at http www teledyne api com terms and conditions asp CAUTION Avoid Warranty Invalidation A and Return Merchandise Authorization RMA procedures when returning parts for repair or calibration Components for Return to Teledyne API s Technical Support in the Primer on Electro Static Discharge section of this manual and for RMA procedures please refer to our Website at http www teledyne api com under Customer Support gt Return Authorization 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank vi 07275B DCN6418 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This operation manual PN 07275 is comprised of multiple docum
162. asic Sample Display Menu 07275B DCN6418 A 3 Appendix Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 SAMPLE CFG ACAL lt TST TST gt MODEL TYPE AND NUMBER PART NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SOFTWARE REVISION LIBRARY REVISION iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION HESSEN PROTOCOL REVISION CPU TYPE amp OS REVISION DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION SAVED 1 Only appears if Dilution option is active Only appears if Hessen protocol is active 3 mode only appears if analyzer is equipped with the related sensor option Only appears if the DUAL or AUTO range modes are selected ACAL is a special configuration consult factory Figure A 2 SETUP DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE Go to iDAS y OFF TIME DATE MODE SET Go to SECONDARY SETUP O2 RANGE 1 Menu Tree SNGL DUAL AUTO amp 02 RANGE 2 CO2 RANGE Primary Setup Menu Except DAS A 4 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A SAMPLE SETUP CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE VIEW EDIT PREV NEXT ENTER PASSWORD 818 PNUMTC PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT CALDAT DETAIL CONC FAST PNUMTC Y S NO CALDAT VIEW DETAIL FAST lt SET SET gt NEXT NX10 PV10 PREV NEXT 10 lt PRM PRM gt TED INTERN i casises the aei ora be AME
163. ating a slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag e While this layer may equalize any charges that occur across the whole bag it does not prevent the build up of static charges If laying on a conductive grounded surface these bags will allow charges to bleed away but the very charges that build up on the surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag by induction onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device Also the liquid impregnating the plastic is eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary plastic bag e Anti Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal usually silvery in color provide all of the charge equalizing abilities of the pink poly bags but also when properly sealed create a Faraday cage that completely isolates the contents from discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges e Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon usually black in color are also excellent at dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and discharges Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to close an anti ESD bag The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape such as Scotch tape from its roll will generate a static charge of several thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an associated field effect that can discharge through or b
164. ation before touching any items on the work station and while standing at least a foot or so away This will allow any charges you are carrying to bleed away through the ground connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to field effects and induction from occurring Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away Only open any anti ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or assemblies after you have plugged your wrist strap into the workstation e Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface Before opening the container wait several seconds for any static charges on the outside surface of the container to be bled away by the workstation s grounded protective mat Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or holding an ESD sensitive Device e Only lay tools or ESD sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of your workstation Never lay them down on any non ESD preventative surface Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti static storage bags or bins and close the bag or bin before unplugging your wrist strap Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the workbench 244 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge 13 4 2 3 TRANSFERRING COMPONENTS FROM RACK TO BENCH AND BACK When transferring a sensit
165. ation on preventing ESD damage To convert an output configured for current loop operation to the standard 0 to 5 VDC output operation 1 Turn off power to the analyzer 2 Ifa recording device was connected to the output being modified disconnect it 3 Remove the top cover as follows 07275B DCN6418 35 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual o Remove the set screw located at the top center of the rear panel b Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit two per side Slide cover back Remove the screw holding the current loop option to the motherboard Lift the cover straight up Disconnect the current loop option PCA from the appropriate connector on the motherboard see Figure 3 8 a Each connector J19 J21 and J23 requires two shunts Place one shunt on the two left most pins b Place the second shunt on the two pins next to it refer to Figure 3 8 for an example Reattach the top case to the analyzer The analyzer is now ready to have a voltage sensing recording device attached to that output 3 3 1 5 CONNECTING THE STATUS OUTPUTS Note The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors which sink up to 50 mA of DC current These outputs can be used to interface with devices that accept logic level digital inputs such as programmable logic controllers PLCs
166. ations Protocols 6 5 1 MODBUS Setup 6 5 2 Hessen 7 DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM DAS amp APICOM 7 1 DAS Structure 7 1 1 DAS Channels 7 1 2 Default DAS Channels 7 1 3 SETUP gt DAS VIEW Viewing DAS Channels and Individual Record 7 1 4 SETUP DAS EDIT Accessing the DAS Edit Mode 7 2 Remote DAS Configuration 7 2 1 DAS Configuration via 7 2 2 DAS Configuration via Terminal Emulation Programs 8 REMOTE OPERATION 8 1 Computer Mode 8 1 1 Remote Control v via a APICOM 8 2 Interactive Mode 8 2 1 Remote Control via a Terminal Emulation Program 8 3 Remote Access by Modem 8 4 COM Port Password Security 9 CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 9 1 Before Calibration 9 1 1 Required Equipment Supplies and Expendables 9 1 2 Calibration Gases 9 1 3 Data Recording Devices 9 2 Manual Calibration Checks and Calibration 9 2 1 Setup for Basic Calibration Checks and Calibration 9 2 2 Performing a Basic Manual Calibration Check 9 2 3 Performing a Basic Manual Calibration 9 3 Assessing Calibration Quality 9 4 Calibration of the T802 s Electronic Subsystems x 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Table of Contents 9 4 1 Pressure Calibration 9 4 2 Flow Calibration 9 5 Calibration of the Optional Sensor 9 5 1 CO Calibration Setup 9 5 2 Set CO Span Gas Concen
167. atus Out Control In Ethernet LAN USB RS 232 and RS 485 This section presents the electrical connections for AC power and communications 3 3 1 1 CONNECTING POWER WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD High Voltages are present inside the analyzers case Turn OFF analyzer power before disconnecting or connecting PCAs wiring AN harnesses or electrical subassemblies Power connection must have functioning ground connection Do not defeat the ground wire on power plug Do not operate with cover off Attach the power cord to the analyzer and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying at least 10 A current at your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth ground CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD The T802 analyzer can be configured for both 100 130 V and 210 240 V at either 47 63 Hz To avoid damage to your analyzer make sure that the AC power voltage matches the voltage indicated on the Analyzer s serial number label tag See Figure 3 4 before plugging the T802 into line power 32 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 3 3 1 2 ANALOG INPUTS OPTION 64 CONNECTIONS The Analog In connector is used for connecting external voltage signals from other instrumentation such as meteorological instruments and for logging these signals in the analyzer s internal DAS The input voltage range for each analog input is 0 10 VDC and th
168. avelength is let through IR Detector IR Light NDIR Source Signal 79 ly Measure Phase Sample M In Out Signal l I Out FPI Reference Phase 1 U Figure 12 3 CO Sensor Theory of Operation The sensor computes the ratio between the reference signal and the measurement signal to determine the degree of light absorbed by CO present in the sensor chamber This dual wavelength method of measuring CO allows the instrument to compensate for ancillary effects like sensor aging and contamination 07275B DCN6418 221 Principles of Operation Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 12 2 1 OPERATION WITHIN THE T802 ANALYZER Operationally the sensor option is transparently integrated into the core analyzer operation All functions can be viewed or accessed through the front panel just like the functions for O2 e The CO2 concentration is displayed in the upper right hand corner alternating with O2 concentration e Test functions for CO2 slope and offset are viewable from the front panel along with the analyzer s other test functions e CO2 sensor calibration is performed via the front panel CAL function and is performed in a nearly identical manner as the standard O2 calibration See Section 9 5 for more details e Stability of the CO2 sensor can be viewed via the front panel see Section 9 5 3 The CO concentrati
169. bas 1 Bow control None T Bestore Defauts OK Cancel USB configuration requires that the baud rates of the instrument and the PC match check the PC baud rate and change if needed e Using the USB port disallows use of the rear panel COM2 port except for multidrop communication 07275B DCN6418 125 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 6 5 COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS This section presents MODBUS and HESSEN information 6 5 1 MODBUS SETUP The following set of instructions assumes that the user is familiar with MODBUS communications and provides minimal information to get started For additional instruction please refer to the Teledyne API MODBUS manual PN 06276 Also refer to www modbus org for MODBUS communication protocols Minimum Requirements Actions Instrument firmware with MODBUS capabilities installed MODBUS compatible software TAPI uses MODBUS Poll for testing see www modbustools com Personal computer Communications cable Ethernet or USB or RS232 Possibly a null modem adapter or cable Set Com Mode parameters Comm Slave ID Ethernet Using the front panel menu go to SETUP MORE COMM INET scroll through the INET submenu until you reach TCP PORT 2 the standard setting is 502 then continue to TCP PORT 2 MODBUS TCP IP press EDIT and toggle the menu button to change the setting to ON then pre
170. beginning of the BCC response lt ETX gt at the end of the response followed by a 2 digit Block Check Code checksum regardless of the command encoding TEXT Responses from the instrument are always delimited with lt CR gt at the beginning and the end of the string regardless of the command encoding To Select a Hessen response mode press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXXXX TST 3 AL SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU 12 HESN 1 2 EXIT HESSEN VARIATION TYPE1 SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET until HESSEN RESPONSE MODE CMD SET SET EDIT EXIT Y HESSEN RESPONSE MODE CMD CMD ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new Press to choose the tt setting Hessen Response type ENTR accepts the new setting The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 07275B DCN6418 131 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 6 5 2 5 GAS LIST ENTRY FORMAT AND DEFINITIONS The T802 analyzer keeps a list of available gas types Each entry in this list is of the following format GAS TYPE RANGE GAS ID REPORTED WHERE GAS TYPE The type of gas being reported e g
171. being used additional configuration and wiring rules must be Observed See Section 8 3 Incorrect setting of the DTE DCE switch is set correctly See Section 6 1 Verify that cable 03596 that connects the serial COM ports of the CPU to J12 of the motherboard is properly seated 11 6 11 2 TROUBLESHOOTING ANALYZER MODEM OR TERMINAL OPERATION These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a Teledyne API analyzer 1 Check cables for proper connection to the modem terminal or computer 2 Check to make sure the DTE DCE is in the correct position as described in Section 6 1 Check to make sure the set up command is correct See Section 8 3 4 Verify that the Ready to Send RTS signal is at logic high The T802 sets pin 7 RTS to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission 5 Make sure the BAUD rate word length and stop bit settings between modem and analyzer match See Section 8 3 6 Use the RS 232 test function to send characters to the modem terminal or computer See Section 8 3 7 Get your terminal modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer holding down the space bar is one way the green LED should flicker as the instrument is receiving data 8 Make sure that the communications software or terminal emulation software is functioning properly Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual RS 232 Programming Notes Teledyne AP
172. bly housing and the critical flow orifice e spring Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o rings the critical flow orifice and the assembly housing Asintered filter Removes particulates to prevent clogging the orifice 12 4 1 CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICE The most important component of this flow control assembly is the critical flow orifice Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates They operate without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice a pressure differential is created This pressure differential combined with the action of the analyzer s pump draws the gas through the orifice 224 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Principles of Operation As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice the pump side continues to drop the speed that the gas flows though the orifice continues to rise Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2 1 the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound As long as that ratio stays at least 2 1 the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations surges or changes in downstream pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical f
173. bration unchanged and return to the previous menu JI Only appears if the DUAL or AUTO range modes are selected Use these buttons to choose the appropriate range Repeat entire procedure for each range Allow span gas to enter the SAMPLE port at the rear of the analyzer RANGE TO CAL RNG1 M PCAL STABIL 0 00 ST TST gt ZERO SPANCONC The SPAN button now appears during the transition from zero to span You may see both buttons If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to appear see Section 13for troubleshooting tips Wait until STABIL falls below 0 01 This may take several minutes Only appears if the optional CO Sensor is installed Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the measurement 02 CAL STABIL 0 00 ST TST gt ENTR CON Y We Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu V4 00 CONC XXXXX EXIT EXIT at this point returns to the SAMPLE menu 07275B DCN6418 175 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual 9 3 ASSESSING CALIBRATION QUALITY After completing one of the calibration procedures described above it is important to evaluate the analyzer s calibration SLOPE and OFFSET parameters These va
174. can have a noticeable effect on the O and optional CO concentration calculations To account for this the T802 software includes a feature which allows the instrument to compensate both the and optional CO calculations based on changes in ambient pressure Both sensors are housed inside temperature controlled manifolds This minimizes temperature effects on the measured concentrations 12 5 12 INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM DAS The DAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that stores trending data for users to anticipate when an instrument will require service Large amounts of data can be stored in non volatile memory and retrieved in plain text format for further processing with common data analysis programs The DAS has a consistent user interface in all Teledyne API analyzers New data parameters and triggering events can be added to the instrument as needed Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters the DAS can store several months of data which are retained even when the instrument is powered off or a new firmware is installed The DAS permits users to access the data through the instrument s front panel or the remote interface The latter can automatically download stored data for further processing For information on using the DAS refer to Section 7 238 07275B DCN6418 13 A PRIMER ON ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE Teledyne API considers the prevention of damage caused by the dis
175. charge of static electricity to be extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to provide reliable service for a long time This section describes how static electricity occurs why it is so dangerous to electronic components and assemblies as well as how to prevent that damage from occurring 13 1 HOW STATIC CHARGES ARE CREATED Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of your analyzer are very small require very little power and operate very quickly Unfortunately the same characteristics that allow them to do these things also make them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity Controlling electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro static charges occur in the first place Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens whenever the atoms of the surface layers of two materials rub against each other As the atoms of the two surfaces move together and separate some electrons from one surface are retained by the other Materials Separate PROTONS z3 ELECTRONS 4 Protons 3 ELectRONs 3 WErGrance 0 NeT CHARGE T T Figure 13 1 Triboelectric Charging If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded the resulting positive or negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place or static
176. cs 61 o 27 28 Lo j a m S 29 30 4 Lo TRI a ES lt lt DefiultR21B 29 E 9 B30B PHDSS LF SN Fro RO nam RT m Lo ene Ho E R3 4 2 GI 13 14 15 ro By E 15 16 5 x Lo a S SUE S E o att 29 k ro B4 23 24 Bs 22uF 6 3 V 6X3 Jumper Ho e JMK3IGBI226KL 0 0022 o DEX CA 112 o 5 27 28 By 29 30 22uF 63V 6 Lo By B30B PHDSS LF SN MIGIGBI2Z26KL 0 0022 O BS 5 CA 112 O S El Lo 33v 5VGND Lo lo ro lo ro lo ro R7 lo ro 100K B3 T o o o 2n ES o 107 05 Deo 9 5 22 6 ro to UR 7 8 41 GMS00480X 70 TTXZ2NLW 9 42 CL5860529 2 up d _ ae 1586 0527 7 4X3 Jumper D D FEMA GM800480W 1 2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 14 16 17 1 2 45 7 8 10 11 Lum Data Image FGO700ADDSWECOT 3 2 6 5 9 8 12 11 15 14 18 17 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 12 GUI Interface nii iani 8173 1 2 3 41516 NG 77879 NG 10 11 13 14 16717718 NC 23 5 6 8 9 11 12 See Number Herition 06698 D Du 6247010 Sheet ora Tic NiPCEMGRY 06006 PIRI schdoc Drawn By RT 07275B DCN6418 D 15 0 16
177. cs supplies for sample gas span gas or zero air 11 4 3 INABILITY TO SPAN NO SPAN BUTTON 1 Confirm that the oxygen span gas source is accurate this can be done by opening the analyzer s SAMPLE inlet to ambient air If the concentration is not displayed as 20 9 there is a problem with the span gas 2 Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 10 3 3 3 Make sure that the expected span gas concentration entered into the instrument during calibration is the correct span gas concentration and not too different from expected span value This can be viewed via the CONC submenu of the Sample displays 4 Check to make sure that there is no ambient air or zero air leaking into span gas line 11 4 4 INABILITY TO ZERO NO ZERO BUTTON 1 Confirm that there is a good source of zero air Dilute a tank of span gas with the same amount of zero air from two different sources If the O2 Concentration of the two measurements is different there is a problem with one of the sources of zero air Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in 10 3 3 Check to make sure that there is no ambient air leaking into zero air line 11 5 OTHER PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS Dynamic problems ie problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is monitoring sample gas can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve The following provides an itemized list of the most common dynamic problems wit
178. d Massive failure of mother board 198 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Troubleshooting and Service WARNING MESSAGE FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES RELAY BOARD WARN bus failure The CPU cannot communicate with Failed relay board the Relay Board Loose connectors wiring SAMPLE FLOW WARN Failed sample pump Blocked sample inlet gas line Dirty particulate filter Leak downstream of critical flow orifice Failed flow sensor circuitry Sample flow rate is lt 80 cm min or gt 180 cm min SAMPLE PRES WARN If sample pressure is 15in Hg Sample Pressure is 15 in Hg or Blocked particulate filter 35 in Hg Blocked sample inlet gas line Failed pressure sensor circuitry If sample pressure is 35 in Hg Pressurized sample gas Install vent Blocked vent line on pressurized sample zero span gas supply Bad pressure sensor circuitry Normally 29 92 in Hg at sea level decreasing at 1 in Hg per 1000 ft of altitude with no flow pump disconnected SYSTEM RESET This message occurs at power on If you have not cycled the power on your instrument Failed 5 VDC power Fatal error caused software to restart Loose connector wiring The computer has rebooted 11 1 2 FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS Note In addition to being useful as predictive diagnostic tools the test functions viewable from the front
179. d function e g SETUP is selected This allows normal operation of the instrument but requires the password 101 to access to the menus under SETUP When PASSWORD is disabled SETUP gt PASS gt OFF any operator can enter the Primary Setup SETUP and Secondary Setup SETUP gt MORE menus Whether PASSWORD is enabled or disabled 78 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual password default 818 is required to enter the VARS or DIAG menus in the SETUP MORE menu Table 5 1 Password Levels PASSWORD LEVEL MENU ACCESS ALLOWED Null 000 Operation All functions of the main menu top level or Primary menu 101 Configuration Maintenance Access to Primary and Secondary SETUP Menus when PASSWORD is enabled 818 Configuration Maintenance Access to Secondary SETUP Submenus VARS and DIAG whether PASSWORD is enabled or disabled IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Toggle this button to enable disable password feasture 7 There are more VARS available when using the password 929 for configuration Use caution when pressing any buttons while in this setup Any changes made may alter the performance of the instrument or cause the instrument to not function properly To discard an accidental change to a setup parameter press EXIT To enable or disable passwords press RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX CFG SETUP X X SYSTEM OFF SETUP X
180. d returns to the CONCENTRATION MENU L Note For this Initial Calibration it is important to independently verify the PRECISE Concentration Value of the SPAN gas If the source of the Span Gas is from a calibrated bottle use the exact concentration value printed on the bottle 174 072758 DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual Calibration Procedures 9 2 3 2 ZERO SPAN POINT CALIBRATION PROCEDURE On instruments with the optional sensor installed the analyzer will continue cycle through the applicable gas measurements throughout this procedure ISAMPLE RANGE 100 00 TST CA O2 XXX XX Allow zero gas to enter the SAMPLE port at the rear of the analyzer SAMPLE 100 00 O2 XXXXX TST TST CAL SETUP Only appears if the GAS TO 1 2 Wm optional CO Sensor is NIRE installed LLL DRM un em 4 RANGE TO CAL RNG1 ENTREXITI O2M P CAL STABIL 100 00 O2 XXX XX TST TST ZERO SETUP cy o2 CAL STABIL 0 00 T ENTR Press EXIT to leave the Set the Display to show the STABIL test function This function calculates the stability of the measurement Wait until STABIL falls below 0 01 This may take several minutes Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the measurement cali
181. do so before continuing see Section 5 4 for instructions Note If any problems occur while performing the following calibration procedures refer to Section 11 for troubleshooting tips 9 1 1 REQUIRED EQUIPMENT SUPPLIES AND EXPENDABLES Calibration of the T802 analyzer requires a certain amount of equipment and supplies These include but are not limited to the following Zero air source e Span gas source e Gas lines All Gas lines should be Stainless Steel PTFE Teflon glass or electroless nickel e Arecording device such as a strip chart recorder and or data logger optional For electronic documentation the internal data acquisition system can be used 9 1 2 CALIBRATION GASES 9 1 2 1 ZERO AIR A gas that is similar in chemical composition to the earth s atmosphere but scrubbed of all components that might affect the analyzers readings Teledyne API recommends using pure when calibrating the zero point of your O or optional CO sensor options CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD AN DO NOT vent calibration gases into enclosed areas Rapid release of pure N gas into an enclosed space can displace oxygen and therefore represents an asphyxiation hazard This may happen with few warning symptoms 9 1 2 2 SPAN GAS Span gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range In this case O measureme
182. ds Rew Paramete Number of Records 4032 360 Records Maximum Trigger Event ATIMER iDAS Parameter Properties E Enable Ch F Hodo E 55 El Pint Repons C Compact Repons Sample Mode AVG v Cancel Automatic Timer Settings Stat Date 1 1 2008 2 Precision Start Time 12 00 00 Sample Period T m HE HH MM eport Period 53 HMM 0 0 C Store number of samples in average Figure 7 3 APICOM User Interface for Configuring the DAS Once a DAS configuration is created or edited it is conveniently saved to your computer and can be uploaded to any instrument it can be stored on a computer for later review alteration or documentation and archival Refer to the APICOM manual for details on these procedures The APICOM user manual Teledyne API PN 058130000 is included in the APICOM installation file which can be downloaded at http www teledyne api com manuals IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Avoid losing data and saved configurations All data parameters and channels will be replaced when uploading a DAS configuration script to the analyzer through its communication ports Back up data and the ori I DAS configuration bef tt ti g any DAS ch 158 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne 7802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 7 2 2 DAS CONFIGURATION VIA TERMINAL EMULATION PROGRAMS IMPORTANT Although Teledyne API recommends the use o
183. e API recommends using pure when calibrating the zero point of your O sensor CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD therefore represents an asphyxiation hazard This may happen with few Rapid release of N gas into an enclosed space can displace oxygen and warning symptoms Do not vent calibration gases into enclosed areas 3 3 2 2 SPAN GAS Span gas is specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range In this case measurements made with the T802 analyzer Teledyne API recommends using 21 when calibrating the span point of your O2 sensor Cylinders of calibrated O gas traceable to NIST Standard Reference Material specifications also referred to as SRMs or EPA protocol calibration gases are commercially available see Table 3 8 46 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Table 3 8 NISTSRMs Available for Traceability of O2 Calibration Gases NIST SRM Type Nominal Concentration 2657a Oz in 2 2658 Oz in 1096 2659a Oz in N2 2196 2619 CO in 0 596 2620a CO in 1 2622 CO in 2 2624 in 3 27445 CO in 796 2745 CO in 16 Used to calibrate optional CO sensor 3 3 2 3 INTERFERENTS It should be noted that other gases also react to magne
184. e diagnostics which can assist in identifying possible problems before they affect the functionality of the analyzer The secondary use is for data analysis documentation and archival in electronic format To support the DAS functionality Teledyne API offers APICOM a program that provides a visual interface for remote or local setup configuration and data retrieval of the DAS The APICOM manual included with the program contains a more detailed description of the DAS structure and configuration which is briefly described here The T802 includes a basic DAS configuration which is enabled by default New data channels are also enabled by default but each channel may be turned off for later or occasional use Note The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel which indicates the analyzer status also indicates certain aspects of the DAS status Table 7 1 Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS LED STATE DAS STATUS System is in calibration mode Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode Steady off Calibration data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods concentration data are typically not sampled diagnostic data should be collected Instrument is in hold off mode a short period after the system exits calibrations DAS blinking channels can be enabled or disabled for this period Concentration data are typically disabled whereas diagnostic should be collected steady on Sampling normall
185. e 12 2 Figure 12 3 Figure 12 4 Figure 12 5 Figure 12 6 Figure 12 7 Figure 12 8 Figure 12 9 Figure 12 10 Figure 12 11 Figure 12 12 Figure 12 13 Figure 12 14 Figure 12 15 Figure 13 1 Figure 13 2 Front Panel Touchscreen and Display 64 Viewing Test Functions Analog Output Connector Pin Ou Setup for Checking Calibrating DCV Analog Output Signal Levels Setup for Checking Calibration Current Output Signal Levels Using an Ammeter 100 Alternative Setup Using 2500 Resistor for Checking Current Output Signal Levels Default DAS Channel Setup APICOM Remote Control Program Interface APICOM User Interface for Configuring the DAS DAS Configuration through a Terminal Emulation Program Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Bottled Span Gas CO Sensor Calibration Set Up Sample Particulate Filter Assembly Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages Example of Signal I O Function CPU Status Indicator Relay PCA Status LEDS Used for Troubleshooting T802 Basic Internal Gas T802 Internal Pneumatics with Sensor Option 67 Location of Diagnostic LEDs on CO Sensor PCA Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly Disassembly Paramagnetic Sensor Design Paramagnetic O Sensor Block Diagram CO Sensor Theory of Operation T802 Internal Pneumatic Flow Basic Configuratio T802 Internal Pneumatic Flow with
186. e as well as transmitted via the analyzer s communication ports The Report Period may be set from the front panel If the INST sample mode is selected the instrument stores and reports an instantaneous reading of the selected parameter at the end of the chosen report period Note In AVG SDEV MIN or MAX sample modes Table 7 3 the settings for the Sample Period and the Report Period determine the number of data points used each time the parameters are calculated stored and reported to the COMM ports The actual sample readings are not stored past the end of the chosen report period When the STORE NUM SAMPLES feature is turned on the instrument will store the number of measurements that were used to compute the AVG SDEV MIN or MAX value but not the actual measurements themselves 07275B DCN6418 149 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual To define the REPORT PERIOD follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 RS232 INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Use the PREV and NEXT to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be edited SETUP X X NAME CONC SET EDIT C Continue pressing SET until ISETUP REPORT PERIOD 000 00 05 SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X REPORT PERIOD DAYS 0 0 ENTR Toggle these b
187. e data on Pin and transmit data on Pin 2 A switch located below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to switch between DTE for use with data terminals or DCE for use with modems Since computers can be either DTE or DCE check your computer to determine which mode to use 6 2 COMMUNICATION MODES BAUD RATE AND PORT TESTING Use the gt gt menu to configure COMI labeled RS232 on instrument rear panel and or COM2 labeled 2 on instrument rear panel for communication modes baud rate and or port testing for correct connection If using a USB option communication connection setup requires USB driver download and configuring a few settings for Section 6 4 07275B DCN6418 113 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 6 2 1 COM PORT COMMUNICATION MODES Each of the analyzer s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different modes listed in Table 6 1 As modes are selected the analyzer sums the mode ID numbers and displays this combined number on the front panel display For example if Quiet mode 01 computer mode 02 and Multi Drop Enabled mode 32 are selected the analyzer would display a combined MODE ID of 35 Table 6 1 COM Port Communication Modes MODE ID DESCRIPTION Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer such as warning messages
188. e induced upon items up to a foot away 07275B DCN6418 243 A Primer on Electro Static Discharge Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 13 4 2 BASIC ANTI ESD PROCEDURES FOR ANALYZER REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE 13 4 2 1 WORKING AT THE INSTRUMENT RACK When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a properly grounded power supply 1 Attach you anti ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to a bare metal portion of the instrument chassis e This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument and all of its components are connected Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work Up to this point the closed metal casing of your analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any conducted or induced static charges If you must remove a component from the instrument do not lay it down on a non ESD preventative surface where static charges may lie in wait Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of the analyzer 13 4 2 2 WORKING AT AN ANTI ESD WORK BENCH When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on a anti ESD workbench 1 Plug you anti ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work st
189. e input impedance is nominally 20kQ in parallel with 0 luF UN o o Figure 3 6 Analog In Connector Pin assignments for the Analog In connector are presented in Table 3 4 Table 3 4 Analog Input Pin Assignments PIN DESCRIPTION PARAMETER 1 Analog input 1 AIN 1 2 Analog input 2 AIN 2 3 Analog input 3 AIN 3 4 Analog input 4 AIN 4 5 Analog input 5 AIN 5 6 Analog input 6 AIN 6 7 Analog input 7 AIN 7 8 Analog input 8 AIN 8 GND Analog input Ground N A 1 See Section 7 for details on setting up the DAS 3 3 1 3 ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTIONS The T802 is equipped with several analog output channels accessible through the ANALOG OUT connector on the rear panel of the instrument The standard configuration for these outputs is VDC An optional current loop output is available for each Section 3 3 1 4 When the instrument is in its default configuration channels A1 and A2 output a signal that is proportional to the concentration of the sample gas Either can be used for connecting the analog output signal to a chart recorder or for interfacing with a data logger If the optional CO sensor is installed A3 outputs a signal proportional to the concentration of the sample gas 07275B DCN6418 33 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Channel A4 is special It can be se
190. e of day clock speed adjustment SERVICE CLEAR OFF OFF ON resets the service interval ON timer TIME SINCE SVC Hours 0 500000 Time since last service SVC INTERVAL Hours 0 100000 Sets the interval between service reminders Medium Access Level Setup Variables 929 password DAYLIGHTSAVING ENABLE ON OFF ON Enables disables automatic Daylight Savings Time change LANGUAGE SELECT ENGL ENGL Selects the language to use for the user interface Enclose value SECD in double quotes when setting EXTN from the RS 232 interface MAINT TIMEOUT Hours 2 0 1 100 Time until automatically switching out of software controlled maintenance mode LATCH WARNINGS ON ON OFF ON enables latching warning messages OFF disables latching CONV TIME 33 MS 33 MS 66 MS Conversion time for and detector channels Enclose value 133 MS in double quotes when setting 266 MS from the RS 232 interface 533 MS 1 SEC 2 SEC 07275B DCN6418 A 9 Appendix Models T802 802E Appendix Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Range Description Units Value NEG CONC SUPPRESS OFF OFF ON ON pegs negative concentrations at zero OFF permits negative concentrations O2 DWELL Seconds 1 0 1 30 Dwell time before taking each sample O2 FI
191. e pins somewhat to fit them into the socket Press the chip all the way in Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine If the replacement DOM carries a firmware revision re enter all of the setup information 11 8 FAQ S The following is a list from the Teledyne API s Technical Support Department of the most commonly asked questions relating to the Model T802 O Analyzer QUESTION ANSWER Why does the ENTR button sometimes disappear on the Front Panel Display During certain types of adjustments or configuration operations the ENTR button will disappear if you select a setting that is nonsensical such as trying to set the 24 hour clock to 25 00 00 or out of the allowable range for that parameter such as selecting a DAS HOLD OFF period of more than 20 minutes Once you adjust the setting in question to an allowable value the ENTR button will re appear Why is the ZERO or SPAN button not displayed during calibration The instrument disables these buttons when the expected span or zero value entered by the users is too different from the gas concentration actual measured value This is to prevent the accidental recalibration of the analyzer to an out of range response curve EXAMPLE The span set point is 16 but gas concentration being measured is only 596 How do enter or change the value of my Span Gas Press the CONC button found under the CAL button of the main SAMPLE display menus to ent
192. e pneumatic subsystem and other 146 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual diagnostic measurements as well as calibration data such as stability slope and offset Most data parameters have associated measurement units such as mV ppb cm min etc although some parameters have no units e g SLOPE With the exception of concentration readings none of these units of measure can be changed Note DAS does not keep track of the units i e of each concentration value therefore DAS data files may contain concentrations data recorded in more than one type of unit if the units of measure was changed during data acquisition Each data parameter has user configurable functions that define how the data are recorded Table 7 3 DAS Data Parameter Functions FUNCTION EFFECT PARAMETER Instrument specific parameter name SAMPLE MODE INST Records instantaneous reading AVG Records average reading during reporting interval SDEV Records the standard deviation of the data points recorded during the reporting interval MIN Records minimum instantaneous reading during reporting interval MAX Records maximum instantaneous reading during reporting interval PRECISION 0 to 4 Sets the number of digits to the right decimal point for each record Example Setting 4 399 9865 Setting 0 400 9o STORE NUM OFF Stores only the average default SAMPLES ON Store
193. e the instrument marks the central safety grounding point for the instrument gt CAUTION This instrument should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described in this manual If you use this instrument in a manner other than that for which it was intended unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous consequences NEVER use any gas analyzer to sample combustible gas es Note For Technical Assistance regarding use and maintenance of this or any other Teledyne API product contact Teledyne API s Technical Support Department Telephone 800 324 5190 Email sda_techsupport teledyne com com 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual CONSIGNES DE S CURIT gt OPRPPPP Des consignes de s curit importantes sont fournies tout au long du pr sent manuel dans le but d viter des blessures corporelles ou d endommager les instruments Veuillez lire attentivement ces consignes Chaque consigne de s curit est repr sent e par un pictogramme d alerte de s curit ces pictogrammes se retrouvent dans ce manuel et l int rieur des instruments Les symboles correspondent aux consignes suivantes AVERTISSEMENT Risque de choc lectrique DANGER Oxydant puissant AVERTISSEMENT G N RAL MISE EN GARDE Lire la consigne compl mentaire pour des renseignements sp cifiques MISE EN GARDE Surface chaude Ne pas toucher Touche
194. e used for troubleshooting purposes Section 11 1 3 Refer to Appendix A for a complete list of the parameters available for review under this menu IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Any changes of signal I O settings will remain in effect only until the signal menu is exited Exceptions are the ozone generator override and the flow sensor calibration which remain as entered when exiting Access the Signal I O test mode from the DIAG Menu and press ENTR to access its parameters DIAG SIGNAL I O Press NEXT amp PREV to move between signal types PREV NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT DIAG 1 O 0 EXT ZERO CAL OFF Press JUMP to go directly to a specific signal PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT See Appendix 4 for a complete list of EXAMPLE available SIGNALS DIAG 1 0 JUMP TO 12 EXAMPLE 1 2 ENTR EXIT Enter 12 to Jump to 12 ST SYSTEM OK ON DIAG 1 0 12 ST_SYSTEM_OK ON Exit to return to the PREV NEXT JUMP ON PRNT EXIT DIAG menu Pressing the PRNT button will send a formatted printout to the serial port and can be captured with a computer or other output device Toggle ON OFF button to change status 90 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 2 ANALOG OUTPUT The T802 analyzer comes equipped with four analog outputs e first two outputs A1 amp A2 carry analog signals that represent the currently measured concentrating of see
195. e vented Figure 3 16 for two reasons in order to ensure that the gases input do not exceed the maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer and to prevent back diffusion and pressure effects These vents should be e Atleast 0 2m long than 2m long and e Vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument 3 3 2 8 EXHAUST OUTLET Attach an exhaust line to the analyzer s EXHAUST outlet fitting The exhaust line should be e PTEF tubing minimum O D 74 e maximum of 10 meters long e Vented outside the T802 analyzer s enclosure preferably outside the shelter or at least into a well ventilated area 07275B DCN6418 49 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual SAMPLE GAS INLET INSTRUMENT CHASSIS Particulate Filter O2 Sensor Flow Pressure Sensor PCA pressure SENSOR 1 Sample Gas Flow Control connects directly to EXHAUST gas SAMPLE 1 intemal pump nat opted for GAS FLOW i SENSOR lt Figure 3 17 T802 Internal Gas Flow Basic Configuration 50 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual INSTRUMENT GAS Particulat EIS EG eric e CO Probe 1
196. ed SETUP features MORE Heni Table 6 5 07275B DCN6418 67 Basic Operation Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 4 4 2 SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP gt MORE Table 6 5 Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions MENU MANUAL MODE OR FEATURE ITEM DESCRIPTION SECTION External Communication Used to set up and operate the analyzer s various external Channel Configuration COM channels including RS 232 RS 485 modem communication 5 7 gura and or Ethernet access Used to view various variables related to the instruments current operational status System Status Variables VARS Changes made to any variable will not be recorded in the 5 8 instrument s memory until the ENTR key is pressed e Pressing the EXIT key ignores the new setting Used to access a variety of functions that configure test or System Diagnostic Features diagnose problems with a variety of the analyzer s basic and DIAG systems 5 9 Analog Output Configuration Most notably the menus to configure the output signals generated by the instruments Analog outputs are located here Alarm Limit Configuration ALRM Used to turn the instrument s two alarms on and off as well as 5 10 setthe trigger limits for each T Alarm warnings only present when optional concentration alarm relay package is installed 68 07275B DCN6418 5 SETUP MENU The SETUP menu is used to set instrument parameters fo
197. els List of Parameters Name CONC Event ATIMER _ Parameters 2 ReportPeriod 000 00 05 No of Records 4032 RS 232 Report ON Channel Enabled ON Cal Hold OFF ON Name PNUMTC Event ATIMER Parameters 2 Report Period 001 00 00 No of Records 360 RS 232 Report OFF Channel Enabled ON Cal Hold OFF OFF Name CALDAT Event O2SLPC Parameters 3 Report Period N A No of Records 200 RS 232 Report OFF Channel Enabled ON Cal Hold OFF OFF Name DETAILED Event Parameters 6 Report Period 000 01 00 No of Records 480 RS 232 Report OFF Channel Enabled ON Cal Hold OFF OFF Name FAST Event ATIMER lt Parameters 6 Report Period 000 00 01 No of Records 360 RS 232 Report OFF Channel Enabled ON Cal Hold OFF Figure 7 1 ISTORE NUM PARAMETER MODE PRECISION SAMPLES O2CNC1 AVG 2 OFF STABIL AVG 2 OFF SMPFLW AVG 1 OFF SMPPRS AVG 1 OFF O2SLP1 O20F81 O2ZSC1 O2CNC1 STABIL SMPPRS BXTMP REFGND RF4096 O2CNC1 STABIL SMPPRS BXTMP REFGND H RF4096 Default DAS Channel Setup 142 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 7 1 3 SETUP DAS VIEW VIEWING DAS CHANNELS
198. ements See Figure 3 7 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output connector V OUT VIN ANALYZER Recording Device Figure 5 2 Setup for Checking Calibrating DCV Analog Output Signal Levels Table 5 6 Voltage Tolerances for the TEST CHANNEL Calibration ZERO SPAN SPAN TOLERANCE VOLTAGE TOLERANCE 1 count 0 0005V 90 mV x0 001V 0 02 mV x0 001V 900 mV x0 001V 0 24 mV x0 002V 4500 mV x0 003V 1 22 mV 0 004V 4500 mV 0 006V 2 44 mV To adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel manually select the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION submenu see Section 5 9 3 then press 98 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 3 AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU From the DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL EXIT DISPLAYEDAS CHANNEL Y ESNE OUE SEM Continue pressing SET unti you reach the CONC OUT 3 Sensor Only PE CATONA TESTOUTPUT A4 DIAG AIO lt SET SET gt CONC OUT 2 5V OVR NOCAL EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO SET EDIT CONC OUT 2 RANGE 5V EXIT C Continue pressing SET until D DIAG DIAG AIO These buttons increase SET gt 0100 UP10 CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED NO CAL EXIT CONC OUT 2 VOLT Z 0 mV UP
199. ents in PDF format as listed below Part No Rev Name Description 07275 B T802 Operation manual 06530 C Menu Trees and Software Documentation inserted as Appendix A in this manual 07269 A Spare Parts List located in Appendix B of this manual 06535 A Expendables Kit located in Appendix B of this manual 06532 C Repair Request Form inserted as Appendix C in this manual Appendix D Documents 0738001 Interconnect List 07380 A Interconnect Diagram 05803 SCH PCA 05802 MOTHERBOARD GEN 5 06698 D SCH PCA 06697 INTRFC LCD TCH SCRN 06882 B SCH LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD 06731 A SCH AUXILLIARY I O BOARD Note We recommend that this manual be read in its entirety before any attempt is ORGANIZATION made to operate the instrument This manual is divided among three main parts and a collection of appendices at the end Part I contains introductory information that includes an overview of the analyzer specifications descriptions of the available options installation and connection instructions and the initial calibration and functional checks Part II comprises the operating instructions which include setup and calibration as well as remote operation and ends with the specifics of calibrating for use in monitoring within EPA protocol Part provides detailed technical information starting with maintenance troubleshooting and service frequently asked questions p
200. er and directly connecting their respective USB ports 1 Install the Teledyne T Series USB driver on your computer downloadable from the Teledyne API website under Help Center gt Software Downloads www teledyne api com software Run the installer file TAPIVCPInstaller exe ledyne API USB COM Port Driver Driver Installer A Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation Teledyne API USB COM Port Driver Installation Location Driver Version 6 1 C Program Files TAPIVCP Driver Change Install Location Connect the USB cable between the USB ports on your personal computer and your analyzer The USB cable should be a Type A Type B cable commonly used as a USB printer cable Determine the Windows XP Com Port number that was automatically assigned to the USB connection Start Control Panel System Hardware Device Manager This is the com port that should be set in the communications software such as APICOM or Hyperterminal Device Manager Ele Action m Ua amp 9nx xa spaenpcai 3 Computer Disk drives Display adapters DVD CD ROM drives Floppy disk controllers Floppy disk drives IDE ATA ATAPI controllers 9 W Keyboards 15 Mice and other pointing devices Monitors E9 Network adapters Ports amp LPT Y Communications Port COMI Printer Port LPT1 Proc Sound video and game controllers 9 1j Syste
201. er or the diluent gas and source gases delivery systems Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal external gas lines damaged seals punctured gas lines a damaged malfunctioning pumps etc 5 Follow the procedures defined in Section 11 6 to confirm that the analyzer s vital functions are working power supplies CPU relay PCA keyboard etc See Figure 3 5 for the general layout of components and sub assemblies in the analyzer See the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D 11 1 1 FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH WARNING MESSAGES The most common and or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message being displayed on the front panel Table 11 1 lists warning messages along with their meaning and recommended corrective action It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same time it is often an indication that some fundamental analyzer sub system power supply relay board motherboard has failed rather than indication of the of the specific failures referenced by the warnings In this case it is recommended that proper operation of power supplies See Section 11 6 2 the relay board See Section 11 6 5 and the A D Board See Section 11 6 9 1 be confirmed before addressing the specific warning messages The analyzer will alert the user that a Warning Message is active by flashing the FAULT LED displaying the Warning message in the Param fie
202. er the expected CO span concentration See Section 9 2 3 1 or for more information Why does the analyzer not respond to span gas Section 11 4 has some possible answers to this question What shall do if the concentration on the instrument s front panel display does not match the value recorded or displayed on my data logger even if both instruments are properly calibrated This most commonly occurs for one of the following reasons A difference in circuit ground between the analyzer and the data logger A wiring problem or a scale problem with the input to the data logger The analog outputs can be manually adjusted to compensate for either or both of these effects see Section 5 9 5 The analog outputs are not calibrated which can happen after a firmware upgrade Both the electronic scale and offset of the analog outputs can be adjusted Section 5 9 3 2 Alternately use the data logger itself as the metering device during calibrations procedures 07275B DCN6418 217 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual QUESTION ANSWER How do perform a leak check See Section 10 3 3 Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated rotameter wet How do measure the sample test meter or other flow measuring device to the sample inlet port flow when the instrument is operating The sample flow should be 120 cm min 10 See Section 9 4 2
203. erating in Sample Mode In this mode a continuous read out of the gas concentration is displayed on the front panel SAMPLE mode is used to e perform calibrations run test functions e read and clear warning messages e output analog data when enabled The next most commonly used operating mode is SETUP mode which is used to e perform certain configuration operations such as programming the DAS system or the configurable analog output channels e setup the analyzer s serial communication channels RS 232 RS 485 Ethernet e perform various diagnostic tests during troubleshooting 07275B DCN6418 63 Basic Operation Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 14 84 Figure 4 1 Front Panel Touchscreen and Display The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the unit is currently running In addition to SAMPLE and SETUP other modes the analyzer can be operated in are Table 4 1 Analyzer Operating Modes MODE EXPLANATION SAMPLE Sampling normally flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on SAMPLE A Indicates that unit is in Sample Mode while AUTOCAL feature is active 02 M P CAL This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated by pressing the CAL key SETUP X X SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer The gas measurement will continue during this Ix process The revision of
204. eration Manual Troubleshooting and Service 11 3 2 5 ACTUAL FLOW DOES NOT MATCH DISPLAYED FLOW If the actual flow measured does not match the displayed flow but is within the limits of 100 140 cm min adjust the calibration of the flow measurement as described in Section 10 3 4 11 3 2 6 SAMPLE PUMP The sample pump should start immediately after the front panel power switch is turned ON With the SAMPLE inlet plugged the test function PRES should read about 10 Hg for a pump in good condition Readings above 10 Hg indicate that the pump needs rebuilding If the test function SAMP FL is greater than 10 cm min there is a leak in the pneumatic lines 11 4 CALIBRATION PROBLEMS 11 4 1 MISCALIBRATED There are several symptoms that can be caused by the analyzer being miscalibrated Miscalibration is indicated by out of range Slopes and Offsets as displayed through the test functions and is frequently caused by the following Bad span gas This can cause a large error in the slope and a small error in the offset Delivered from the factory the T802 s slope is within 15 of nominal Bad span gas will cause the analyzer to be calibrated to the wrong value If in doubt have the span gas checked by and independent lab Contaminated zero gas Excess H20 can cause positive or negative offset and will indirectly affect the slope Dilution calibrator not set up correctly or is malfunctioning This will also cause the slope but not the
205. eripherals 0 normal 2 RST 7 0 hardware reset 8584 chip 1 normal Control inputs U11 J1004 pins 1 6 bits 0 5 default address 321 hex MB RELAY 39 EXT CAL MODE 0 0 go into calibration mode 1 exit calibration mode and go into measure mode EXT CAL SPAN 1 0 calibrate span 1 calibrate zero EXT CAL RANGE2 2 0 calibrate range 2 1 calibrate range 1 EXT CAL CO2 3 0 calibrate CO2 1 calibrate O2 4 5 Spare 6 7 Always 1 Control inputs U14 J1006 pins 1 6 bits 0 5 default I O address 325 hex 0 5 Spare 6 7 Always 1 Control outputs U17 J1008 pins 1 8 bits 0 7 default I O address 321 hex 0 7 Spare Control outputs U21 J1008 pins 9 12 bits 0 3 default I O address 325 hex 0 3 Spare Alarm outputs U21 J1009 pins 1 12 bits 4 7 default address 325 hex ST SYSTEM OK2 4 1 system OK MB RELAY 36 0 any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode Controlled by MODBUS coil register ST CONC ALARM 1 5 1 conc limit 1 exceeded MB RELAY 37 0 conc OK Controlled by MODBUS coil register ST CONC ALARM 2 6 1 conc limit 2 exceeded MB RELAY 38 0 conc OK Controlled by MODBUS coil register ST AUTO RANGE2 1 auto range 2 in use 0 auto range 1 in use Controlled by MODBUS coil register A 20 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A
206. es for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance LIST OF FIGURES Figure 3 1 Front Panel Layout 25 Figure 3 2 Display Screen and Touch Control 26 Figure 3 3 Display Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts 28 Figure 3 4 Rear Panel Layout Figure 3 5 Internal Layout s Figure 3 6 Analog In Connector 33 Figure 3 7 Analog Output Connectoi 34 Figure 3 8 Current Loop Option Installed Figure 3 9 Status Output Connector Figure 3 10 Control Input Connector Figure 3 11 Concentration Alarm Relay Figure 3 12 Default Pin Assignments Rear Panel COM Port Connectors Figure 3 13 CPU Connector Pin Outs for RS 232 Mode Figure 3 14 Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode Figure 3 15 RS 232 Multidrop PCA Host Analyzer Interconnect Diagram Figure 3 16 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Bottled Span Gas Figure 3 17 T802 Internal Gas Flow Basic Configuration Figure 3 18 T802 Internal Gas Flow with CO Sensor Optio Figure 3 19 Viewing and Clearing T802 WARNING Messages xii 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Table of Contents Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 10 1 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 11 5 Figure 11 6 Figure 11 7 Figure 11 8 Figure 12 1 Figur
207. essen Protocol from the Teledyne API web site http www teledyne api com manuals To select a Hessen Protocol Type press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX TST TST ZA SETUP ISETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS RN PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT T COMMUNICATIONS MENU 10 1 2 HESSEN VARIATION TYPE1 SET EDIT EXIT HESSEN VARIATION TYPE1 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting TYP1 TYP2 Toggle to choose the Hessen type ENTR accepts the new setting The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory Note While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for COM1 and COM2 The TYPE selection affects both ports 130 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 6 5 2 4 SETTING THE HESSEN PROTOCOL RESPONSE MODE The Teledyne API implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of several different modes of response for the analyzer Table 6 5 Teledyne API Hessen Protocol Response Modes MODE ID MODE DESCRIPTION This is the Default Setting Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional CMD command format Style and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating command Responses from the instrument are always delimited with lt STX gt at the
208. esulting potential difference creates a current Coi 1 SU 2 mec Source 2G Figure 12 2 Paramagnetic Sensor Block Diagram 220 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Principles of Operation This current is passed to a feedback loop which generates a second current to a wire winding in effect a small DC electric motor mounted on the suspended mirror The more present the more the dumbbell and its attached mirror moves and the more current is needed to move the dumbbell back to it s zero position Finally sensor measures the amount of current generated by the feedback control loop which is directly proportional to the concentration of oxygen within the sample gas mixture 12 2 NDIR MEASUREMENT OF CO The optional CO sensor is a silicon based Non Dispersive Infrared NDIR sensor It uses a single beam dual wavelength measurement method An infrared source at one end of the measurement chamber emits IR radiation into the sensor s measurement chamber where light at the 4 3 um wavelength is partially absorbed by any CO present A special light filter called a Fabry Perot Interferometer FPI is electronically tuned so that only light at the absorption wavelength of CO is allowed to pass and be detected by the sensor s IR detector A reference measurement is made by electronically shifting the filter band pass wavelength so that no IR at the CO absorption w
209. f APICOM the DAS can also be accessed and configured through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal see Figure 7 4 for example It is best to start by downloading the default DAS configuration getting familiar with its command structure and syntax conventions and then altering a copy of the original file offline before uploading the new configuration Instrument HyperTerminal B pi Yew tep Dia al 3 cle 2 SETUP PROPERTIES FOR ENGDRT ENGDRT EVENT ATINER REPORT PERIOD 000 00 02 NUMBER OF RECORDS 2000 RS 232 REPORT pm ON CAL 3 OFF PARAMETERS 4 PRRRMETER RCTEMP MODE RVG PRECISION 4 STORE_SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER CNVTHP MODE AVG STORE SRMPLES OFF PARAMETER PMTTHP MODE AVG STORE_SAMPLES OFF PARAMETER BOXTHP MODE AVG STORE_SAMPLES OFF PRRRMETER O3FLOW MODE RVG PI STORE SRMPLES OFT PHRRMETER SMPFLW HODE AVG STORE SRMPLES OFF PRRRMETER SMPPRS MODE RVG PRECISIO STORE SRMPLES OFF PRRRMETER RCPRES MODE RVG PRECISION amp STORE SAMPLES OFF PRRRMETER RZERO MODE AVG PRECISION STORF SRMPLES OFF PRRRMETER HVPS E PRI ES 4 STORE SRMPLES OFT PRRRMETER PMTDET 06 PI STORE SRMPL ES OFF PRRRMETER RF4096 HODI VG PRECISO STORE SRMPLES OFF PRRRMETER REFGND MODE RVG PRECISION amp STORE SRMPLES OFF connected 0 01 52 TC 7 4 DAS Configuration through a Terminal Emulation Program
210. f Operation Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Two conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to the short filter First the instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long filter by a fixed amount default setting is lt 2 Second the instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long filter by a portion or percentage of the average in the long filter also lt 2 by default If necessary these boxcar lengths as well as the threshold levels can be altered but with corresponding tradeoffs in rise time and signal to noise ratio contact Teledyne API Technical Support for more information 12 5 10 CALIBRATION SLOPE AND OFFSET Calibration of the analyzer is performed exclusively in software During instrument calibration the user enters expected values for zero and span via the front panel keypad and commands the instrument to make readings of calibrated sample gases for both levels The readings taken are adjusted linearized and compared to the expected values With this information the software computes values for instrument slope and offset and stores these values in memory for use in calculating the O concentration of the sample gas The instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration are available for viewing from the from the front panel See Section 3 4 2 12 5 11 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE COMPENSATION Changes in ambient pressure
211. f the components and functions that are normally under algorithmic control of the CPU can be manually exercised The technician can directly control the signal level Analog and Digital Output signals This allows the technician to observe systematically the effect of directly controlling these signals on the operation of the analyzer The following flowchart shows an example of how to use the Signal I O menu to view the raw voltage of an input signal or to control the state of an output voltage or control signal 200 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Troubleshooting and Service SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXXXX T SETUP SE PRIMARY SETUP MENU G ACAL DAS RANG F LK MORE EXIT SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU ENTR EXIT DIAG EXI DIAG VO 0 EXT CAL MODE OFF ENTER PASSWORD 818 T PREV NEXT EDIT PRNT EXI Press PREV and 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT NEXT to scroll through the menu DIAG VO TEXT CAL SPAN OFF PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT Use the JUMP button to go directly to a specific signal address see Appendix A for a list DIAG VO JUMPTO 0 of all VO SIGNALS jo ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to set which signal address to JUMP to DIAG VO JUMPTO 22 2 2 ENTR EXIT DIAGVO 22 02 CELL HEATER OFF P
212. from your network server see Section 6 3 1 If your network is not running DHCP see your network administrator or configure the Ethernet interface manually see Section 6 3 2 3 4 3 INITIAL CALIBRATION To perform the following calibration you must have sources for zero air and span gas available for input into the SAMPLE port on the back of the analyzer See Section 3 3 2 for instructions for connecting these gas sources The initial calibration should be carried out using the same reporting range set up as used during the analyzer s factory calibration This will allow you to compare your calibration results to the factory calibration as listed on the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet If both available DAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the instrument s analog outputs e g CONCI and CONC2 when the DUAL range mode is activated separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter e Use the RNG1 button when calibrating for CONC1 equivalent to LOW RANGE e Use the RNG2 button when calibrating for CONC2 equivalent to HIGH RANGE The calibration procedures assume e the zero point and span gases have been adjusted for known interferents Section 3 3 2 3 e thatthe calibration gas will be supplied through the SAMPLE gas inlet on the back of the analyzer see Figure 3 4 and e that the pneumatic setup matches that described in Section 3 3 2 4 Perform the following outline of p
213. g the T802 If the analyzer s reporting range is set for the DUAL or AUTO range modes a step will appear for selecting which range is to be calibrated RNG1 LOW or RNG2 HIGH Each of these two ranges MUST be calibrated separately 9 2 3 1 SETTING THE EXPECTED SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION Note appropriate range range Only appears if the DUAL or AUTO range modes are selected Use these keys to choose the Repeat entire procedure for each When se span gas The expected span gas concentration should be 80 of the reporting range of the instrument see Section 5 4 1 The default factory setting is 20 95 To set the span gas concentration press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX SETUP Only sree Se the GAS TO CAL O2 optional ensor 02 2 __ RANGETOCALRNG ENTR IRNG1 RNGZ 02 CAL RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX lt TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT 20 95 The span concentration value is automatically default to If this is not the concentration of the span gas being used toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the O2 calibration gas ICAL 02 SPAN CONC 20 95 5 EXIT ignores the new 0 ENTR EXIF setting and returns to the previous display gt 0 2 0 9 ENTR accepts the new setting an
214. gas if installed The display screen also shows what mode the analyzer is currently in as well as messages and data Param Along the bottom of the screen is a row of touch control buttons only those that are currently applicable will have a label Table 3 2 provides detailed information for each component of the screen COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY Do not use hard surfaced instruments such as pens to operate the control buttons 26 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Table 3 2 Display Screen and Touch Control Description Field Description Function Status LEDs indicating the states of Sample Calibration and Fault as follows Name Color State Definition Off Unit is not operating in sample mode DAS is disabled On Sample Mode active Front Panel Display being updated DAS data SAMPLE Green being stored Blinking Unit is operating in sample mode front panel display being updated DAS hold off mode is ON DAS disabled Off Auto Cal disabled CAL Yellow On Auto Cal enabled Blinking Unit is in calibration mode Off No warnings exist FAULT Red P Blinking Warnings exist Conc Displays the actual concentration of the sample gas currently being measured by the analyzer in the currently selected units of measure Mode Displays the name of the analyzer s current operating mode Param Displays a variety of informational messages such as warn
215. ge If more than one warning is active the next message will take SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET 02 XXX XX its place TEST MSG CLR SETUP SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 02 XXX XX TST TST gt CAL Figure 11 1 Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages Table 11 1 Warning Messages Indicated Failures WARNING MESSAGE FAULT CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES 02 CELL TEMP The O cell temp is controlled at 50 Bad heater Bad temperature sensor Bad relay controlling the heater WARN 2 Entire relay board is malfunctioning bus malfunction NOTE Box temperature typically runs 7 c warmer than ambient temperature AEN kis Temos c Poor blocked ventilation to the analyzer or 4 Stopped exhaust fan Ambient temperature outside of specified range CANNOT DYN Em Measured concentration value is too high or low SPAN Dynamic Span operation failed Concentration slope value to high or too low CANNOT DYN T Measured concentration value is too high ZERO Dynamic Zero operation failed Concentration offset value to high CONFIG Configuration and Calibration data Failed disk on module INITIALIZED reset to original Factory state User erased data DATA INITIALIZED Data Storage in DAS was erased Failed Disk on Module User cleared data REAR BOARD NOT DET Motherboard not detected on power up Warning only appears on serial O COM port s Front panel display will be frozen blank or will not respon
216. gital converter located on the motherboard A variety of sensors report the physical and operational status of the analyzer s major components again through the signal processing capabilities of the motherboard These status reports are used as data for the concentration calculation and as trigger events for certain control commands issued by the CPU They are stored in memory by the CPU and in most cases can be viewed but the user via the front panel display The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of manners e Through the analyzer s keyboard and vacuum florescent display over a clocked digital serial I O bus using a protocol called 12C e RS 232 amp RS 485 Serial I O channels e Via an optional Ethernet communications card e Various DCV and DCA analog outputs and e Several sets of Digital I O channels 226 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Principles of Operation Finally the CPU issues commands via a series of relays and switches also over the bus located on a separate printed circuit assembly to control the function of key electromechanical devices such as heaters RS232 coma USB Male Female port ANALOG IN Ethernet Vc Bus COMZ RS 232 or 5185
217. h recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions 11 5 1 TEMPERATURE PROBLEMS Individual control loops are used to maintain the set point of the absorption bench filter wheel and IR photo detector temperatures If any of these temperatures are out of range or are poorly controlled the T802 will perform poorly 11 5 1 1 BOX TEMPERATURE The box temperature sensor is mounted to the motherboard and cannot be disconnected to check its resistance Rather check the BOX TEMP signal using the SIGNAL I O function under the DIAG Menu See Section 5 9 This parameter will vary with ambient temperature but at 30 C 6 7 above room temperature the signal should be 1450 mV 208 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Troubleshooting and Service 11 6 SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT Section 10 discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures or performance problems within the analyzer In most cases this included a list of possible causes This describes how to determine individually determine if a certain component or subsystem is actually the cause of the problem being investigated 11 6 1 AC MAINS CONFIGURATION The analyzer is correctly configured for the AC mains voltage in use if 1 The Sample Pump is running 2 If incorrect power is suspected check that the correct voltage and frequency is present at the line input on the rear panel e Ifthe unit is se
218. he operation of the A to D converter on the motherboard is to use the Signal I O function under the DIAG menu to check the two A D reference voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter k Use the Signal I O function See Section 11 1 3 and Appendix A to view the value of REF 4096 MV and REF If both are within mV of nominal 4096 and 0 and are stable 0 2 mV then the basic A D is functioning properly If not then the motherboard is bad Choose a parameter in the Signal I O function such as SAMPLE PRESSURE or SAMPLE FLOW e Compare these voltages at their origin see interconnect drawing PN 06407 and interconnect list PN 06294 in Appendix D with the voltage displayed through the signal I O function e If the wiring is intact but there is a large difference between the measured and displayed voltage 10 mV then the motherboard is bad 11 6 9 2 ANALOG OUTPUTS CURRENT LOOP To verify that the analog outputs with the optional current mode output are working properly connect a 250 ohm resistor across the outputs and use a voltmeter to measure the output as described in Section 5 9 3 6 For each step the output should be within 196 of the nominal value listed in the table below Table 11 7 Analog Output Test Function Nominal Values Current Outputs OUTPUT RANGE 2 20 4 20 NOMINAL OUTPUT VALUES STEP CURRENT V 250 OHMS CURRENT V 250 OHMS
219. he pneumatics CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD The exhaust from the analyzer s internal or customer supplied external pump MUST be vented outside the immediate area or shelter surrounding the instrument Source of VENT here if input SAMPLE GAS is pressurized Removed during calibration 10096 Concentration Calibrated Manual Control Valve Calibrated at 20 95 Span Concentration Figure 3 16 Pneumatic Connections Basic Configuration Using Bottled Span Gas 3 3 2 5 SAMPLE GAS SOURCE Attach a sample inlet line to the SAMPLE inlet port The SAMPLE input line should not be more than two 2 meters long e Maximum pressure of any gas at the SAMPLE inlet should not exceed 1 5 in Hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure e In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold a vent must be placed on the sample gas before it enters the analyzer Please refer to Figure 3 16 48 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 3 3 2 6 CALIBRATION GAS SOURCES The source of calibration gas is also attached to the SAMPLE inlet but only when a calibration operation is actually being performed Note Zero air and span gas flows should be supplied in excess of the 120 demand of the analyzer 3 3 2 7 INPUT GAS VENTING The span gas zero air supply and sample gas line MUST b
220. he pump take the following steps 1 power is being supplied to the pump but it is not turning replace the pump 2 If the pump is operating but the unit reports no gas flow perform flow check as described in Section 10 3 4 3 If no independent flow meter is available Disconnect the gas lines from both the sample inlet and the exhaust outlet on the rear panel of the instrument Make sure that the unit is in basic SAMPLE Mode e Place a finger over a Sample inlet on the rear panel of the instrument e If gas is flowing through the analyzer you will feel a vacuum suction at the inlet 07275B DCN6418 205 Troubleshooting and Se rvice Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 11 3 2 2 LOW FLOW 4 If gas flows through the instrument when it is disconnected from its sources of zero air span gas or sample gas the flow problem is most likely not internal to the analyzer Check to ensure that All calibrators generators are turned on and working correctly Gas bottles are not empty or low e Valves regulators and gas lines are not clogged or dirty 1 Checkifthe pump diaphragm is in good condition If not rebuild the pump See Section 10 3 2 Check the Spare Parts List for information on pump rebuilding kits 2 Check for leaks as described in Section 10 3 3 Repair the leaking fitting line and re check 3 Check for the sample filter and the orifice fi
221. ic charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels Anti ESD wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there is no available grounded plug e Also anti ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor usually around one meg ohm that protects you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument s power supply 242 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient While this may temporarily bleed off static charges present at the time once you stop touching the grounded metal new static charges will immediately begin to re build In some conditions a charge large enough to damage a component can rebuild in just a few seconds Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti ESD storage bags or bins Even when you are not working on them store all devices and assemblies in a closed anti Static bag or bin This will prevent induced charges from building up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from discharging through it Use metallic anti ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components and assemblies rather than pink poly bags The famous pink poly bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with a liquid similar to liquid laundry detergent which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic cre
222. ical flow orifice sample flow and the sample filter clogging indicated by a drop in sample pressure over time to predict when maintenance will be required The last 360 daily averages about 1 year are stored CALDAT Data channel logs new slope and offset of O measurements each time a zero or span calibration is performed and the result changes the value of the slope triggering event SLPCHG The stability to evaluate if the calibration value was stable as well as the converter efficiency for trend reference are also stored e This data channel will store data from the last 200 calibrations and can be used to document analyzer calibration it also is useful for detecting trends in Slope and offset instrument response when performing predictive diagnostics as part of a regular maintenance schedule 140 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual IMPORTANT e The CALDAT channel collects data based on events e g a calibration operation rather than a timed interval and therefore does not represent any specific length of time As with all data channels a date and time stamp is recorded for every logged data point DETAILED Samples six different parameters related to the operating status of the analyzer s optical sensors For each parameter e A value is logged once every minute e average of the last 60 readings is calculated once every minute 60 seconds e
223. ied by O2 CELL SET variable WCO2CELLTEMP CO2 CELL TEMP WARN CO sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by CO2 CELL SET variable WDYNZERO CANNOT DYN ZERO Contact closure zero calibration failed while DYN ZERO was set to ON WDYNSPAN CANNOT DYN SPAN Contact closure span calibration failed while DYN SPAN was set to ON WREARBOARD REAR BOARD NOT DET Rear board was not detected during power up WRELAYBOARD RELAY BOARD WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board WFRONTPANEL FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel WANALOGCAL ANALOG CAL WARNING The A D or at least one D A channel has not been calibrated 1 T Series E Series T Series E Series T Series E Series 5 T Series E Series T Series E Series T Series E Series T Series E Series 10 801 803 or 802 with CO option 802 or 803 801 or 803 802 only 803 only 802 with CO2 option 801 or 802 without CO option External analog input option The name is used to request a message via the RS 232 interface as in T BOXTEMP 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Table A 3 Test Measurements Name Message Text Description Test Measurements O2RANGE O2 RNG 500 0 D A range in single or auto range modes CO2RANGE CO2 RNG 500 0 O2RANGE1 O2 1 50
224. inal quotation mark For example 1 123abc and lt gt are all valid text strings Itis not possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string Some commands allow you to access variables messages and other items When using these commands you must type the entire name of the item you cannot abbreviate any names 8 2 1 4 STATUS REPORTING Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS 232 interface the other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic format You can effectively disable the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode Section 6 2 1 Table 6 1 Status reports include warning messages calibration and diagnostic status messages Refer to Appendix A 3 for a list of the possible messages 8 2 1 5 GENERAL MESSAGE FORMAT All messages from the instrument including those in response to a command line request are in the format X DDD HH MM Id MESSAGE lt CRLF gt Where X is a command type designator a single character indicating the message type as shown in the Table 8 2 DDD HH MM is the time stamp the date and time when the message was issued It consists of the Day of year DDD as a number from 1 to 366 the hour of the day HH as a number from 00 to 23 and the minute MM as a number from 00 to 59 ID is the analyzer ID
225. ing messages operational data test function values and response messages during interactive tasks Control Buttons Displays dynamic context sensitive labels on each button which is blank when inactive until applicable Figure 3 3 shows how the front panel display is mapped to the menu charts illustrated in this manual The Mode Param parameters and Conc gas concentration fields in the display screen are represented across the top row of each menu chart The eight touch control buttons along the bottom of the display screen are represented in the bottom row of each menu chart 07275B DCN6418 27 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Menu Chart Layout Param Display Example 14 84 Menu Chart Representing Display Example SAMPLE 02 RNG 100 00 02 14 84 TEST CLR SETUP Figure 3 3 Display Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts 28 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne 7802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Sample Fan LEDs Port Cooling Exhaust Serial I O Port Status Analog Digital Control Ethernet Analog Inputs Outputs Outputs Inputs P o o o o o o AC Power not used 52 2 COM2 VoltFi USB Port Connector oce ore COMM 1 port COMM 2 port Information Switch RS232 only
226. is bad Several of the control devices are in sockets and can be easily replaced 11 6 7 SENSOR ASSEMBLY The paramagnetic sensor of your T802 analyzer has no user serviceable parts 11 6 8 PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR ASSEMBLY The pressure flow sensor PCA can be checked with a Voltmeter using the following procedure which assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard and the power supplies are operating properly 1 For Pressure related problems e Measure the voltage across C1 it should be 5 0 25 VDC If not then the board is bad e Measure the voltage across TP4 and TP1 With the sample pump disabled it should be 4500 mV 250 mV With the pump energized it should be approximately 200 mV less If not then S1 the pressure transducer is bad the board is bad or there is a pneumatic failure preventing the pressure transducer from sensing the absorption cell pressure properly 2 For flow related problems e Measure the voltage across TP2 and 1 it should be 10 0 25 VDC Ifnotthen the board is bad With flow stopped sample inlet blocked the voltage should be approximately 1V Ifthe voltage is incorrect the flow sensor is bad the board is bad or there is a leak upstream of the sensor 07275B DCN6418 211 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 11 6 9 MOTHERBOARD 11 6 9 1 A D FUNCTIONS The simplest method to check t
227. itional entries should be added see Section 6 5 2 6 EXAMPLE Changing the above O gas list entry to read O2 2 110 REPORTED while RANGE2 HIGH range was active would cause only the last O reading to be recorded 132 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 6 5 2 6 EDITING OR ADDING HESSEN GAS LIST ENTRIES To add or edit an entry to the Hessen Gas List press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2200 XX T T SETUP UP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CLK MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT HESSEN VARIATION TYPE1 SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET until SET SET HESSEN GAS LIST EDIT EXIT Toggle to set the appropriate GAS ID For new list entries this number will be displayed as 000 Toggle to turn ON OFF the REPORT attribute SETUP XX O2 0 110 REPORTED PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT EXIT Press PREV and NEXT to iss Scroll between gas list entries SETUP XX GAS TYPE 02 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Press PREV and NEXT to scroll between gas types y N SETUP XX CONC RANGE 0 Toggle to set the ENTR EXIT concentration range for the list entry ISETUP XX 0 0 GAS 10 12 Number 0 ENTR EXIT gt ISETUP X
228. itry on the motherboard PRESSURE This function is used to calibrate the Sample CALIBRATION Pressure sensor DIAG PCAL 242 FLOW This function is used to calibrate the sample gas CALIBRATION flow DIAG FCAL 942 TEST CHAN Selects one of the available test channel signals to OUTPUT output over the A4 analog output channel DIAG TCHN Be These settings are retained after exiting DIAG mode 88 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual To access the DIAG functions press the following menu sequence RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX SETUP SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS ACAL RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 818 8 SIGNAL DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT returns to the SECONDARY SETUP MENU ANALOG CONFIGURATION ENTR Activates the ENTR EXIT selected DIAG submenu DIAG PRESSURE CALIBRATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT FLOW CALIBRATION ENTR EXIT TEST CHANNEL OUTPUT ENTR EXIT The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 07275B DCN6418 89 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 1 SIGNAL I O The signal I O diagnostic mode allows a user to review and change the digital and analog input output functions of the analyzer It can also b
229. ive device from an installed Teledyne API analyzer to an Anti ESD workbench or back 18 T3 Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti ESD bag or bin Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate e f you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point f you are at an anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface In either case wait several seconds Place the item in the container Seal the container If using a bag fold the end over and fastening it with anti ESD tape e Folding the open end over isolates the component s inside from the effects of static fields Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device Once you have arrived at your destination allow any surface charges that may have built up on the bag or bin during travel to dissipate e Connect your wrist strap to ground e f you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point f you are at a anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface In either case wait several seconds Open the container 13 4 2 4 OPEN
230. l 1 connects directly SAME irecty to Exhaust outlet 1 PUMP Cd 1 option Figure 12 4 T802 Internal Pneumatic Flow Basic Configuration 12 3 1 PNEUMATIC OPERATION OF THE CO SENSOR Pneumatically the sensor is placed in line with the sample gas line between the particulate filter and the analyzer s sample chamber It does not alter the gas flow rate of the sample through the analyzer 07275B DCN6418 223 Principles of Operation Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual SAMPLE GAS INLET EXHAUST GAS OUTLET INSTRUMENT CHASSIS Particulate Gr CO Probe Flow Pressure SAMPLE Sensor PCA pressure SENSOR Flow Control PUMP connects directly to Exhaust outlet SAMPLE ifinternal pump not opted for GAS FLOW option SENSOR Figure 12 5 T802 Internal Pneumatic Flow with CO Sensor Option 12 4 FLOW RATE CONTROL To maintain a constant flow rate of the sample gas through the instrument the T802 uses a special flow control assembly located in the exhaust gas line just before the optional internal pump or connected to the rear panel if using an external pump These assemblies consist of A critical flow orifice e Two o rings Located just before and after the critical flow orifice the o rings seal the gap between the walls of assem
231. l duty cycle Fraction 20 Concentration stability 96 22 Sample flow 24 Sample pressure Hg 26 Internal box temperature 28 Ground reference REF GND mV 30 4096 mV reference REF_4096_MV mV 100 slope for range 1 1025 slope for range 2 104 CO offset for range 1 106 CO offset for range 2 96 108 CO concentration for range 1 during zero span calibration just 96 before computing new slope and offset 1105 CO concentration for range 2 during zero span calibration just 96 before computing new slope and offset 112 CO concentration for range 1 96 114 CO concentration for range 2 96 116 CO sensor temperature 118 CO sensor cell temperature control duty cycle Fraction A 29 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 MODBUS Register Description Units Address dec 0 based 1307 External analog input 1 value Volts 1327 External analog input 1 slope eng unit V 1347 External analog input 1 offset eng unit 1367 External analog input 2 value Volts 1387 External analog input 2 slope eng unit V 1407 External analog input 2 offset eng unit 1427 External analog input 3 value Volts 1447 External analog input 3 slope eng unit V 1467 External analog input 3 offset eng unit 1487 External analog in
232. ld along with the CLR button press to clear Warning message The MSG button displays if there is more than one warning in queue or if you are in the TEST menu and have not yet cleared the message The following display touchscreen examples provide an illustration of each 196 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Troubleshooting and Service 14 84 14 84 Top the CLR button is available to clear the warning message displayed in the Param field Bottom the MSG button indicates that at least one warning message has not yet been cleared The analyzer will also alert the user via the Serial I O COM port s 07275B DCN6418 197 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual SAMPLE Suppresses the aet warning messages To view or clear the various warning messages press SYSTEM RESET ISAMPLE KTST TST gt CAL NOTE If a warning message persists after several attempts to clear it the message may indicate a real problem and not an artifact of the warm up period Once the last warning has been cleared the RANGE function will be displayed in the analyzer s main MESSAGE FIELD RANGE 100 MSG MSG returns the active Y warnings to the message field SAMPLE WARNING TEST CAL Press CLR to clear the current messa
233. ledyne API recommends setting up the first link between the Host and the first analyzer and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain Note The communication Host instrument can address only one instrument at a time each by its unique ID see step 7 above 07275B DCN6418 45 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual RS 485 CONNECTION As delivered from the factory COM2 is configured for RS 232 communications This port can be reconfigured for operation as a non isolated half duplex RS 485 port Using COM2 for RS 485 communication will disable the USB port To reconfigure this port for RS 485 communication please contact the factory 3 3 2 PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS This section presents information about gases and pneumatic connections CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD While O is itself not toxic the sample gas measured by and in some cases the hazardous e g NO NO2 SO CO etc calibration gases used with the T802 can contain other components that are Obtain a Material Safety Data Sheet MSDS for each such gas Read and rigorously follow the safety guidelines described there Do not vent sample gases containing hazardous components into enclosed areas 3 3 2 1 CALIBRATION GASES ZERO GAS Zero gas is similar in chemical composition to the earth s atmosphere but scrubbed of all components that might affect the analyzers readings Teledyn
234. libration mode CO2SLC CO slope and offset recalculated EXITDG Exit diagnostic mode CONC1W Concentration limit 1 exceeded CONC2W Concentration limit 2 exceeded O2TMPW sensor cell temperature warning CO2TMW sensor cell temperature warning SFLOWW Sample flow warning SPRESW Sample pressure warning BTEMPW Box temperature warning 1 future T Series E Series 802 or 803 T Series E Series 801 803 or 802 with CO option A 24 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A Table A 6 DAS Parameters Name Description Units O2SLP1 Oe slope for range 1 O2SLP2 slope for range 2 O20FS1 Oe offset for range 1 96 O20FS2 Oe offset for range 2 CO 2SL1 CO slope for range 1 2512 slope for range 2 CO20F1 CO offset for range 1 CO20F2 CO offset for range 2 0275 1 concentration for range 1 during zero span calibration just 96 before computing new slope and offset 0275 2 Oe concentration for range 2 during zero span calibration just before computing new slope and offset CO2ZS1 concentration for range 1 during zero span calibration just 96 before computing new slope and offset 027 23 CO concentration for range 2 during zero span calibration just 96 before computing new slope
235. lication such as HyperTerminal SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2z2XXX XX SETUP XX COMMUNICATIONS MENU TST TST CAL SETUP ID EXIT SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS 818 DHCP ON 8 1 8 ENTR EDIT EXIT SETUP X X PRI MARY SETUP MENU DHCP ON CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT ON SETUP XX SECONDARY SETUP MENU DHCP OFF COMM EXIT OFF ENTR EXIT continues in next illustration ENTRVaccept new settings EXIT ignores new settings 07275B DCN6418 121 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Internet Configuration Touchscreen Functions C Continued from preceding illustration FUNCTION Press this key to cycle through the range of 10 numerals and available characters 0 9 amp CH CH Moves the cursor one charader left or right DHCP OFF DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location T ENTR new soting and retums to ho previous j Exit the new setting and retums to the previous menu INST IP 000 000 000 000 Buttons appear only as applicable SET SET EDIT Cursor location is indicated by brackets INST IP 0 00 000 000 CH CH DEL 0 ENTR EXIT 1 000 000 000 000 SET SET ES SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 GATEWAY IP 0 00 00
236. littered across the landscape of the component s circuitry A quick comparison of the values in Table 13 1 with the those shown in Table 13 2 listing device susceptibility levels shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates that approximately 60 of device failures are the result of damage due to electro static discharge Table 13 2 Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE DEVICE RANGE DAMAGE BEGINS CATASTROPHIC OCCURRING AT DAMAGE AT MOSFET 10 100 VMOS 30 1800 NMOS 60 100 GaAsFET 60 2000 EPROM 100 100 JFET 140 7000 SAW 150 500 190 2500 CMOS 200 3000 Schottky Diodes 300 2500 Film Resistors 300 3000 This Film Resistors 300 7000 ECL 500 500 SCR 500 1000 Schottky TTL 500 2500 Potentially damaging electro static discharges can occur 240 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Primer on Electro Static Discharge Any time a charged surface including the human body discharges to a device Even simple contact of a finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can allow enough discharge to cause damage A similar discharge can occur from a charged conductive object such as a metallic tool or fixture When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device to another surface such as packaging materials work surfaces machi
237. log Output Adjusts the signal output CO Sensor Only DIAG TEST_OUTPUT 5V OVR CAL Scrolls to the parameter to be SET SET EDIT EXIT M output on the TEST channel and adjusts its signal output DIAG AIN CALIBRATED YES lt SET CAL ACAL submenu the Primary Setup Menu is special configuration consult factory 92 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 3 1 ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE CURRENT RANGE SELECTION In its standard configuration the analog outputs are set to output a 0 5 VDC signals Several other output ranges are available Each range is usable from 5 to 5 of the rated span Table 5 5 Analog Output Voltage Range Min Max RANGE NAME RANGE SPAN MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT 0 1V 0 100 mvDC 5 105 1V 0 1 VDC 0 05 VDC 1 05 VDC 5V 0 5 VDC 0 25 VDC 5 25 VDC 10V 0 10 VDC 0 5 VDC 10 5 VDC The default offset for all VDC ranges is 0 5 VDC CURR 0 20 mA 0 mA 20mA While these are the physical limits of the current loop modules typical applications use 2 20 or 4 20 mA for the lower and upper limits Please specify desired range when ordering this option The default offset for all current ranges is 0 mA To change the output type and range select the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION submenu see Section 5 9 3 then press 07275B DCN64
238. low orifice CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICE AREA OF AREA OF HIGH LOW PRESSURE PRESSURE Shockwave SPRING FILTER Figure 12 6 Flow Control Assembly amp Critical Flow Orifice The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice volume of gas per unit of time depends on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice The larger the hole the more gas molecules moving at the speed of sound pass through the orifice Because the flow rate of gas through the orifice is only related to the minimum 2 1 pressure differential and not absolute pressure the flow rate of the gas is also unaffected by degradations in pump efficiency due to age The critical flow orifice used in the T802 is designed to provide a flow rate of 120 12 4 2 PARTICULATE FILTER The T802 Analyzer comes equipped with a 47 mm diameter Teflon particulate filter with a 1 micron pore size The filter is accessible through the front panel which folds down to allow access and should be changed according to the suggested maintenance schedule described in 12 4 3 PNEUMATIC SENSORS 12 4 3 1 SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR An absolute value pressure transducer plumbed to the outlet of the sample chamber is used to measure sample pressure The output of the sensor is used to 07275B DCN6418 225 Principles of Operation Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual compensate the concentration measurement for changes in ambient air press
239. lter for dirt Replace filters See 10 3 1 Check for partially plugged pneumatic lines Clean or replace them Check for plugged or dirty critical flow orifices Replace them 11 3 2 3 HIGH FLOW The most common cause of high flow is a leak in the sample flow control If no leaks or loose connections are found in the fittings or the gas line between the orifice and the pump replace the critical flow orifice inside the sample flow control assembly 11 3 2 4 DISPLAYED FLOW WARNINGS This warning means that there is inadequate gas flow There are four conditions that might cause this leak upstream or downstream of the flow sensor A flow obstruction upstream or downstream of the flow sensor Bad Flow Sensor Board Bad pump To determine which condition is causing the flow problem view the sample pressure and sample flow functions on the front panel display If the sample pressure is reading abnormally low then the cause is likely a flow obstruction upstream of the flow sensor First check the sample filter and make sure it is not plugged and then systematically check all the other components upstream of the orifice to ensure that they are not obstructed If the sample pressure is reading normal but the sample flow is reading low then it is likely that the pump diaphragm is worn or there is an obstruction downstream of the flow sensor 206 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Op
240. lues describe the linear response curve of the analyzer The values for these terms both individually and relative to each other indicate the quality of the calibration To perform this quality evaluation functions Section 3 4 2 or Appen inthe DAS cl you will need to record the values of both test ix A 3 all of which are automatically stored annel CALDAT for data analysis documentation and archival Make sure that these parameters are within the limits listed below and frequently compare them to those values on the Final Test and Checkout Sheet PN 068350000 that came attached to your manual which should not be significantly ifferent If they are refer to troubleshooting in Section 11 Table 9 2 Calibration Data Quality Evaluation FUNCTION MINIMUM VALUE OPTIMUM VALUE MAXIMUM VALUE SLOPE 0 700 1 000 1 300 OFFSET 0 500 0 000 0 500 These values should not be significantly different from the values recorded on the Teledyne API Final Test and Validation Data Sheet that was shipped with your instrument If they are refer to troubleshooting in Section 11 The default DAS configuration records all calibration values in channel CALDAT as well as all calibration check zero and span values in its internal memory Up to 200 data points are stored for up 4 years of data on weekly calibration checks and a lifetime history of monthly calibrations e Review these data to see if the zero
241. ly to cycle through the available character set 0 9 NOTE Values of A F can also be set but are meaningless Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a unique ID code If more than one T802 analyzer is on the Hessen network you will have to change this code for all but one of the T802 analyzer s on the Hessen network see Section 5 7 1 The default ID code for the T802 analyzers is either 0 or 802 136 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank 07275B DCN6418 137 7 DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM DAS amp APICOM The T802 analyzer contains a flexible and powerful internal data acquisition system DAS that enables the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as well as a host of diagnostic parameters The DAS is capable of capturing several months worth of data depending on how it is configured The data are stored in non volatile memory and are retained even when the instrument is powered off Data are stored in plain text format for easy retrieval and use in common data analysis programs such as spreadsheet type programs The DAS is designed to be flexible users have full control over the type length and reporting time of the data The DAS permits users to access stored data through the instrument s front panel or its communication ports The principle use of the DAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictiv
242. lyzer using APICOM terminal emulators or other programs The Ethernet cable connector on the rear panel has two LEDs indicating the Ethernet s current operating status Table 6 2 Ethernet Status Indicators LED FUNCTION amber link On when connection to the LAN is valid green activity Flickers during any activity on the LAN The analyzer is shipped with DHCP enabled by default This allows the instrument to be connected to a network or router with a DHCP server The instrument will automatically be assigned an IP address by the DHCP server This configuration is useful for quickly getting an instrument up and running on a network However for permanent Ethernet connections a static IP address should be used Section 6 3 2 details how to configure the instrument with a static IP address 6 3 1 CONFIGURING THE ETHERNET INTERFACE USING DHCP Note The Ethernet for your T802 uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP to configure its interface with your LAN automatically This requires that your network servers also be running DHCP The analyzer will do this the first time you turn the instrument on after it has been physically connected to your network Check the INET settings the first time you power up your analyzer after it has been physically connected to the LAN Internet to make sure that the DHCP has successfully downloaded the appropriate information from you network server s The Ethernet configuration
243. m devices amp Universal Serial Bus controllers TemA Refer to the Quick Start Direct Cable Connection section of the Teledyne APICOM Manual PN 07463 124 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 In the instrument s SETUP gt MORE gt COMM gt COM2 menu make the following settings Baud Rate 115200 COM Mode Settings Quiet Mode ON SECURITY MODE OFF Computer Mode ON MULTIDROP MODE OFF MODBUS RTU OFF ENABLE MODEM OFF MODBUS ASCII OFF ERROR CHECKING ON E 8 1 MODE OFF XON XOFF HANDSHAKE OFF E 7 1 MODE OFF HARDWARE HANDSHAKE OFF RS 485 MODE OFF HARDWARE FIFO ON COMMAND PROMPT OFF 6 Next configure your communications software such as APICOM Use the COM port determined in Step 4 and the baud rate set in Step 5 The figures below show how these parameters would be configured in the Instrument Properties window in APICOM when configuring a new instrument See the APICOM manual PN 07463 for more details Code Activated Switch Handshaking Securty Direct Cable Connection Properties Base Amati Daconnect Nome Local instrument Comm COMI Setings Connection Twe Dret able gt Setinge 4 Instrument Pot 9 Pott Port 2 Mode Var Name Properties Ste Name hd Pot Settings Defauts Bt per second 115208 Cancel Duabus E Party Bop
244. m m TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION EverywhereyoulookK OPERATION MANUAL MODEL T802 PARAMAGNETIC OXYGEN ANALYZER TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION 9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE SAN DIEGO CA 92121 5201 USA Toll free Phone 800 324 5190 Phone 858 657 9800 Fax 858 657 9816 Email api sales teledyne com Website http www teledyne api com Copyright 2010 2013 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation 14 January 2013 ABOUT TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION TAPI Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation Inc TAPI is a worldwide market leader in the design and manufacture of precision analytical instrumentation used for air quality monitoring continuous emissions monitoring and specialty process monitoring applications Founded in San Diego California in 1988 TAPI introduced a complete line of Air Quality Monitoring AQM instrumentation which comply with the United States Environmental Protection Administration EPA and international requirements for the measurement of criteria pollutants including CO SO NOx and Ozone Since 1988 TAPI has combined state of the art technology proven measuring principles stringent quality assurance systems and world class after sales support to deliver the best products and customer satisfaction in the business For further information on our company our complete range of products and the applications that they serve please visit
245. magnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 3 4 AUTOMATIC GROUP CALIBRATION OF THE ANALOG OUTPUTS IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Manual calibration should be used for any analog output set for a 0 1V output range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device Before performing this procedure ensure that the AUTO CAL for each analog output is enabled See Section 5 9 3 3 To calibrate the outputs as group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command select the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION submenu see Section 5 9 3 then press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG VO CONFIGURATION CONC_OUT_3 is only active on analyzers with the optional CO sensor installed PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET CAL EXIT DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 1 AUTO CALIBRATING CONC OUT 2 This message 3 appears when DIAGAIO NOT AUTO CAL CONC OUT 3 gt AUTO CALis Turned OFF for AIO AUTO CALIBRATING TEST OUTPUT a channel DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO Analyzer automatically calibrates all channels for which AUTO CAL is turned ON If any of the channels have not been calibrated or if at least one channel has AUTO CAL turned OFF this message will read NO SET CAL EXIF 96 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne
246. mber The T802 analyzer s multi tasking software gives the ability to track and report a large number of operational parameters in real time These readings are compared to diagnostic limits kept in the analyzer s memory where should any fall outside of those limits the analyzer issues automatic warnings Built in data acquisition capability using the analyzer s internal memory allows the logging of multiple parameters including averaged or instantaneous concentration values calibration data and operating parameters such as pressure and flow rate Stored data are easily retrieved through the serial port or optional Ethernet port via our APICOM software or from the front panel allowing operators to perform predictive diagnostics and enhanced data analysis by tracking parameter trends Multiple averaging periods of one minute to 365 days are available for over a period of one year 1 2 FEATURES Some exceptional features of your T802 Paramagnetic Oxygen Analyzer are e Non depleting paramagnetic sensor for O2 specific measurement e Virtually no cross sensitivities e Rapid response times e No consumable parts e Consistent performance over time No susceptibility to CO2 poisoning unlike electromechanical O2 sensors e Microprocessor controlled for versatility e LCD Graphical User Interface with capacitive touch screen e Multi tasking software for viewing of test variables during operation e Continuous self checking with alarms e
247. minus sign followed by one or more digits For example 1 12 123 are all valid integers Hexadecimal integer data Used for the same purposes as integers e They consist of the two characters Ox followed by one or more hexadecimal digits 0 9 A F a f which is the C programming language convention No plus or minus sign is permitted e For example 0x1 0x12 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal integers Floating point number Used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points time intervals warning limits voltages etc e They consist of an optional plus or minus sign followed by zero or more digits an optional decimal point and zero or more digits e Atleast one digit must appear before or after the decimal point e Scientific notation is not permitted e For example 1 0 1234 5678 0 1 1 are all valid floating point numbers Boolean expressions Used to specify the value of variables or I O signals that may assume only two values e They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF 162 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual Remote Operation Text strings Used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data types such as data channel names which may contain letters and numbers e They consist of a quotation mark followed by one or more printable characters including spaces letters numbers and symbols and f
248. n alarm relay package is installed 3 Clears the next time successful span calibration is performed Clears the next time successful zero calibration is performed 5 Does not clear after power up 3 4 2 FUNCTIONAL CHECKS After the analyzer s components have warmed up for at least 60 minutes verify that the software properly supports any hardware options that were installed For information on navigating through the analyzer s software menus see the menu trees described in Appendix A 1 Check to make sure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating parameters Appendix C includes a list of test functions viewable from the analyzer s front panel as well as their expected values These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing performance problems with your analyzer see Section 11 1 2 The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data Sheet PN 068350000 lists these values before the instrument left the factory Remember until the unit has completed its warm up these parameters may not have stabilized If your local area network LAN is running a dynamic host configuration protocol DHCP software package the Ethernet will automatically configure its interface with your LAN However it is a good idea to check these settings to 54 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual make sure that the DHCP has successfully downloaded the appropriate network settings
249. n or touch electric connections with metallic tools while operating inside the analyzer Use common sense when operating inside a running analyzer 11 1 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING The T802 paramagnetic Oz analyzer has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected evaluated and repaired During operation it continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without disturbing monitoring operations systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps 07275B DCN6418 195 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 1 Note any WARNING MESSAGES and take corrective action as necessary 2 Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values Note any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action 3 Use the internal electronic status LEDs to determine whether the electronic communication channels are operating properly Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the relay PCA Note that the analyzer s DC power wiring is color coded and these colors match the color of the corresponding test points on the relay PCA 4 SUSPECT ALEAK FIRST Technical Support data indicate that the majority of all problems are eventually traced to leaks in the internal pneumatics of the analyz
250. n protocol network is to activate the Hessen mode for COM ports and configure the communication parameters for the port s appropriately Press 00 00 JP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU MORE EXIT SETUPXX SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU Combined Mode ID displayed here COM1 QUIET MODE OFF Press PREV and NEXT to scroll between the available modes NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL ON Activate Deactivate the HESSEN mode by toggling ON OFF PREV NEXT OFF EXIT COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL OFF PREV NEXT ON ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the 1 MODE 16 new setting SET EDIT EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 07275B DCN6418 129 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 6 5 2 3 SELECTING A HESSEN PROTOCOL TYPE Currently there are two versions of Hessen Protocol in use The original implementation referred to as TYPE 1 and a more recently released version TYPE 2 that has more flexibility when operating with instruments that can measure more than one type of gas For more specific information about the difference between TYPE land 2 download the Manual Addendum for H
251. naffected by the settings chosen for the reporting range s of the instrument 70 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 4 2 ANALOG OUTPUT RANGES FOR O CONCENTRATION The analyzer has several active analog output signals accessible through a connector on the rear panel see Figure 3 4 ANALOG OUT CONC RANGE1 concentration Only active if the Optional outputs Sensor is installed p _ Channel A1 A2 A3 A4 LOW range wh n DUAL HIGH range when DUAL mode is selected mode is selected Figure 5 1 Analog Output Connector Pin Out All three outputs can be configured either at the factory or by the user for full scale outputs of 0 1 VDC IVDC 5VDC or 10VDC Additionally A1 and A2 may be equipped with optional 0 20 mA current loop drivers and configured for any current output within that range e g 0 20 2 20 4 20 etc The user may also adjust the signal level and scaling of the actual output voltage or current to match the input requirements of the recorder or data logger See Section 5 9 5 The 1 and A2 channels output a signal that is proportional to the concentration of the sample gas Several modes are available which allow them to operate independently or be slaved together See Section 5 4 3 EXAMPLE A1 OUTPUT Output Signal 0 5 VDC representing 0 100 concentration values A2 OUTPUT Output Signal
252. nd pressure STP Standard Temperature and Pressure TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol the standard communications protocol for Ethernet devices TEC Thermal Electric Cooler TPC Temperature Pressure Compensation USB Universal Serial Bus a standard connection method to establish communication between peripheral devices and a host controller such as a mouse and or keyboard and a personal computer or laptop VARS Variables the variable settings of the instrument V F Voltage to Frequency zs Zero Span 250 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A APPENDIX A Version Specific Software Documentation APPENDIX 1 Software Menu Trees Software Versions 1 0 3 T Series A 3 3 APPENDIX A 2 Setup Variables For Serial I O Software Versions 1 0 3 T Series A 3 E Series 9 APPENDIX 3 Warnings and Test Measurements Software Versions 1 0 3 T Series A 3 E Series 17 APPENDIX A 4 Signal I O Definitions Software Versions 1 0 3 T Series A 3 20 APPENDIX 5 DAS Triggering Events Parameters Software Version s 1 0 3 T Series A 3 E Series 24 APPENDIX 6 Terminal Command Designators Software Versions 1 0 3 T Series A 3 E Series 27 APPENDIX 7 MODBUS Regi
253. nd reliably over its lifetime Repairs and troubleshooting are covered in Section 11 of this manual 10 1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Note Table 10 1 shows a typical maintenance schedule for the analyzer Please note that in certain environments i e dusty very high ambient pollutant levels some maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often than shown A Span and Zero Calibration Check see CAL CHECK REQ D Column of Table 10 1 must be performed following certain of the maintenance procedure listed below HAZARD STRONG OXIDIZER OXYGEN IS A STRONG OXIDIZER Before working with the casing open be sure to turn off power supply and perform air or gas purging of not only the analyzer inside but also the sample gas line In addition carefully prevent oil and grease from adhering to any piping Otherwise poisoning fire or explosion may be caused due to gas leakage etc CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Risk of electrical shock Disconnect power before performing any of the following operations that require entry into the interior of the analyzer A CAUTION QUALIFIED PERSONNEL The operations outlined in this Section are to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only 07275 DCN6418 185 Section Technical Information Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank 186 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T8
254. ne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual Remote Operation To initialize the modem press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX T SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU AL DAS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP SECONDARY SETUP MENU DIAG EXIT COMM VARS COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET COM1 COM2 1 MODE 0 lt SET SET gt Continue pressing lt SET or SET gt until 1 INITIALIZE MODEM lt SET SET gt INIT EXIT n INITIALIZING MODE Test Runs Automatically MODEM INITIALIZED PRE NEXT OFF EXIT If there is a problem initializing the modem the message MODEM NOT INITIALIZED will appear The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 07275B DCN6418 165 Remote Operation Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual 8 4 COM PORT PASSWORD SECURITY In order to provide security for remote access of the T802 a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE Mode 4 Section 6 2 1 Once the SECURITY MODE is enabled the following items apply A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands e Ifthe port is inactive for one hour it will automatically logoff which can also be achieved with the LOGO
255. ne surfaces or other device In some cases charged device discharges can be the most destructive A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the connector or wiring harness of the equipment in which it is to function If the assembly is carrying a static charge as it is connected to ground a discharge will occur Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro static field a charge may be induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device If the device is then momentarily grounded while within the electrostatic field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and grounded somewhere else a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to ground 13 3 COMMON MYTHS ABOUT ESD DAMAGE I didn t feel a shock so there was no electro static discharge The human nervous system isn t able to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts Most devices are damaged by discharge levels much lower than that I didn t touch it so there was no electro static discharge Electro Static charges are fields whose lines of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet away from the surface bearing the charge It still works so there was no damage Sometimes the damaged caused by electro static discharge can completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to fail immediately More likely the trace will be only partially
256. nel refer Figure 3 11 They are a Common C a Normally Open NO and a Normally Closed NC pin 38 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual ALARM f ALARM2 ALARM 3 ALARM 4 c ar ar ar RA NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC Figure 3 11 Concentration Alarm Relay Alarm 1 System OK 2 Alarm 2 Conc 1 Alarm 3 Conc 2 Alarm 4 Range Bit ALARM 1 RELAY Alarm 1 which is System OK 2 system OK 1 is the status bit is in the energized state when the instrument is OK amp there are no warnings If there is a warning active or if the instrument is put into the DIAG mode Alarm 1 will change states This alarm has reverse logic meaning that if you put a meter across the Common amp Normally Closed pins on the connector you will find that it is OPEN when the instrument is OK This is so that if the instrument should turn off or lose power it will change states amp you can record this with a data logger or other recording device ALARM 2 RELAY amp ALARM 3 RELAY The Alarm 2 Relay on the rear panel is associated with the Concentration Alarm 1 set point in the software amp the Alarm 3 Relay on the rear panel is associated with the Concentration Alarm 2 set point in the software Alarm 2 Relay Os Alarm 1 xxx Alarm 3 Relay O Alarm 2 xxx Alarm 2 Relay CO Alarm 1 xxx If CO option is present Alarm 3 Relay CO Alarm 2 xxx
257. ng the Sample Pump 190 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures 10 3 3 PERFORMING LEAK CHECKS HAZARD STRONG OXIDIZER OXYGEN IS A STRONG OXIDIZER ONLY Perform Leak Checks using N gas and after thoroughly purging the analyzer s internal pneumatics Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction Section 10 3 3 1 presents a simple leak check procedure Section 10 3 3 2 details a more thorough procedure 10 3 3 1 VACUUM LEAK CHECK AND PUMP CHECK This method is easy and fast It detects but does not locate most leaks It also verifies that the sample pump is in good condition 1 Turn the analyzer ON and allow enough time for flows to stabilize 2 Capthe SAMPLE inlet port 3 After several minutes when the pressures have stabilized note the following In the TEST menu note the SAMPLE PRESSURE reading 4 If the reading is lt 10 in Hg the pump is in good condition and there are no large leaks 5 Check the sample gas flow If the flow is 10 cm min and stable there are no large leaks in the instrument s pneumatics 10 3 3 2 PRESSURE LEAK CHECK If you can t locate the leak by the above procedure use the following procedure Obtain a leak checker similar to the Teledyne API PN 01960 which contains a small pump shut off valve and pressure gauge Alternatively a convenient source of low pressure gas is a tank of
258. nt is performed in software and does not require physical adjustments to the instrument During calibration the microprocessor measures the current state of Sensor output and various other physical parameters of the instrument and stores them in memory The microprocessor uses these calibration values measurements made on the sample gas along with data regarding the current temperature and pressure of the gas to calculate a final O concentration The optional CO sensor allows the T802 to measure both and CO simultaneously This option includes a CO sensor probe a Logic PCA that conditions the probe output and issues a 0 5 VDC signal to the analyzer s CPU that is used to compute the CO concentration The T802 receives this input scales it based on the values of the CO2 SLOPE and CO2 OFFSET Recorded during calibration see Section 9 5 12 1 PARAMAGNETIC OXYGEN MEASUREMENT 12 1 1 MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF O GAS Molecular oxygen displays a particularly strong susceptibility to the effect of magnetic fields This is due to the behavior of the electrons of the two oxygen atoms that make up the O molecule When the electrons in an orbital are paired they spin in opposite directions from each other thereby canceling any magnetic field effects On the other hand unpaired electrons such as those of an O molecule spin in the same direction as each other increasing the aggregate magnetic field 12 1 2 PRINCIPLE OF
259. nth name 9od Day of month as decimal number 01 31 96H Hour in 24 hour format 00 23 Hour in 12 hour format 01 12 9oj Day of year as decimal number 001 366 Yom Month as decimal number 01 12 96M Minute as decimal number 00 59 A M P M indicator for 12 hour clock 96S Second as decimal number 00 59 9ow Weekday as decimal number 0 6 Sunday is 0 Year without century as decimal number 00 99 Y Year with century as decimal number 9596 Percent sign ALARM TRIGGER Cycles 1 100 Number of times concentration must exceed limit to trigger alarm 07275B DCN6418 A 15 Appendix Models T802 802E Appendix Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Range Description Units Value FACTORY OPT BitFlag 0 O Ox7fffftff Factory option flags Add values to combine flags 1 enable dilution factor 2 display units in concentration field 4 enable software controlled maintenance mode 8 enable switch controlled maintenance mode 16 enable concentration alarms 32 enable Internet option 16384 enable external analog inputs T Series E Series T Series E Series T Series E Series T Series E Series 5 T Series E Series T Series external T Serie
260. nts made with the T802 analyzer Teledyne API recommends using 21 when calibrating the span point of sensor option 170 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual Calibration Procedures Cylinders of calibrated Oz gas traceable to NIST Standard Reference Material specifications also referred to as SRMs or EPA protocol calibration gases are commercially available Table 9 1 NISTSRM s Available for Traceability of Calibration Gases NIST SRM Type Nominal Concentration 2657a Oz in N2 2 2658 02 in 10 2659 Oz in 2196 2619 CO in 0 5 2620 CO in 196 2622a CO in 296 2624 CO in 396 2744b CO in 796 2745 CO in 16 1 Used to calibrate optional CO sensor Note For span point calibration it is generally a good idea to use 80 of the reporting range for that channel For instance if the reporting range of the instrument is set for 5 the proper span gas would be 4 9 1 3 DATA RECORDING DEVICES A strip chart recorder data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should be used to record data from the serial or analog outputs of the T802 07275B DCN6418 171 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual If analog readings are used the response of the recording system should be checked against a NIST tr
261. o view these TEST functions press RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX lt TST TST gt CAL SETUP RANGE Value 1 O2 RN1 Value O2 RN2 Value vits ES CO2 RNG Value Do STABIL Value p 4 PRES Value IN HG A functions 1 This will match the currently selected units of measure for the range being displayed Only appears if the CO sensor option is installed 3 The STABIL function can be set to display data to the optional sensor Only appears if analog output A4 is actively reporting a TEST FUNCTION Note Note SAMP FL ValueJCC IM O2 SLOPE Value O2 OFFSET ValueMV CO2 SLOPE Valuef CO2 O2 CELL TEMP ValuePC CO2 CELL TEMP ValuepPC BOX TEMP ValuePC TIME HH MM SS Figure 4 2 Viewing Test Functions A value of Warnings displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an out of range reading or the analyzer s inability to calculate it All pressure measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure Absolute atmospheric pressure is 29 92 in Hg A at sea level It decreases about 1 in Hg per 300 m gain in altitude A variety of factors such as air conditioning and passing storms can cause changes in the absolute atmospheric pressure 07275B DCN6418 65 Basic Operation Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer
262. occluded by the damage causing degraded performance of the device or worse weakening the trace This weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time but even the very low voltage and current levels of the device s normal operating levels will eat away at the defect over time causing the device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached e These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which the damaged device is installed causes down time lost data lost productivity as well as possible failure and damage to other pieces of equipment or property Static Charges can t build up on a conductive surface There are two errors in this statement e Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded The charge will be equalized across the entire device but without access to earth ground they are still trapped and can still build to high enough levels to cause damage when they are discharged 07275B DCN6418 241 A Primer Electro Static Discharge Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual e A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and or discharge triggered in the presence of a charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface of a nylon jacket of someone walking up to a workbench As long my analyzer is properly installed it is safe from damage caused by static discharges It is true that when p
263. of ambient and stack gas instruments from a remote connection through direct cable modem or Ethernet Running APICOM a user can e Establish a link from a remote location to the T802 through direct cable connection via RS 232 modem or Ethernet e View the instrument s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be accessed when standing in front of the instrument e Remotely edit system parameters and set points e Download view graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis e Check on system parameters for trouble shooting and quality control APICOM is very helpful for initial setup data analysis maintenance and troubleshooting Figure 7 2 shows examples of APICOM s main interface which emulates the look and functionality of the instruments actual front panel APICOM is included free of cost with the analyzer and the latest versions can also be downloaded at http www teledyne api com software 072758 8 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual Remote Operation 8 2 INTERACTIVE MODE Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs or a dumb computer terminal 8 2 1 REMOTE CONTROL VIA A TERMINAL EMULATION PROGRAM Start a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal configuration commands must be created following a strict syntax or be pasted in from a text file which was edited offline and then uploaded through a specific
264. og input 4 value eng unit XIN5 External analog input 5 value Volts XIN5SLPE 5 External analog input 5 slope eng unit V 5 External analog input 5 value eng unit 5 External analog input 6 value Volts XINGSLPE External analog input 6 slope eng unit V XIN6OFST External analog input 6 value eng unit XIN7 5 External analog input 7 value Volts XIN7SLPE 5 External analog input 7 slope eng unit V XIN7OFST External analog input 7 value eng unit 5 External analog input 8 value Volts XIN8SLPE 5 External analog input 8 slope eng unit V XIN8OFST 5 External analog input 8 value eng unit 1 2 E 4 T Series E Series 801 803 or 802 with CO option T Series E Series 802 or 803 T Series E Series 801 or 803 T Series E Series 802 only T Series External analog input option A 26 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A APPENDIX A 6 Terminal Command Designators Software Versions 1 0 3 T Series A 3 E Series Table A 7 Terminal Command Designators COMMAND ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX DESCRIPTION ID Display help screen and commands list LOGON ID password Establish connection to instrument LOGOFF ID Terminate connection to instrument SET ALL name hexmask Display test s TID LIST ALL name hexmask NAM
265. oise lt 0 02 RMS Span Noise lt 0 1 of reading RMS Lower Detectable Limit lt 0 04 Zero Drift lt 0 02 24 hours lt 0 05 7 days Span Drift lt 0 1 7 days Accuracy lt 1 5 of range 2 of reading Temperature Coefficient lt 0 01 degree C Rise and Fall Time 60 seconds to 95 120ml x20ml min Flow Rate Humidity Range 0 95 RH 25 31 in HG Pressure Range AC Power 100V 120V 60 Hz 77W 220V 240 V 50 Hz 80W Analog Output Ranges All Outputs 0 1 V 1 V 5 Vor 10 V Three outputs convertible to 4 20 mA isolated current loop All Ranges with 5 underlover range Recorder Offset 10 Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 of selected full scale voltage Standard 1 Ethernet 10 100Base T 2 RS 232 300 115 200 baud 2 USB device ports 8 opto isolated digital status outputs 6 opto isolated digital control inputs 4 analog outputs Optional I O 1 USB com port 1 RS485 8 analog inputs 0 10V 12 bit 4 digital alarm outputs Multidrop RS232 4 20mA current outputs Alarm outputs 2 opto isolated alarms outputs with user settable alarm limits 1 As defined by the USEPA Defined as twice the Zero Noise level by the USEPA 3 Note Zero Drift is typically lt 0 1 O during the first 24 hours of operation 07275B DCN6418 21 Specifications Approvals amp Compliance Teledyne T802 P
266. om the pump Remove the fitting and the components as shown in the exploded view below 5 Replace the o rings PN OR000001 and the sintered filter PN 1 000001 If replacing the critical flow orifice itself PN 000940700 make sure that the side with the colored window usually red is facing upstream to the flow gas flow Apply new Teflon tape to the male connector threads Re assemble in reverse order 07275B DCN6418 215 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 9 After reconnecting the power and pneumatic lines flow check the instrument as described in the Section 10 3 4 _7 PNEUMATIC CONNECTOR P 1 4 ELBOW A FT0000016 _ SPRING 0000020 P SINTERED FILTER 210000001 O RING A 080000001 O RING e d OR0000001 CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICE e PURGE HOUSING 000940700 000850100 install with jewel facing down Figure 11 8 Critical Flow Restrictor Assembly Disassembly 11 7 2 DISK ON MODULE REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY Servicing of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge protection i e ESD grounding straps mats and containers Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty Refer to Section 13 for more information on preventing ESD damage Replacing the Disk on Module DOM will cause lo
267. on Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 3 4 8 4 ZERO SPAN CALIBRATION To perform the zero span calibration procedure press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX Set the Display to show the STABIL test function This function calculates the stability of the O2 measurement lt TS TST gt CAL SETUP Toggle TST gt button until SAMPLE STABIL 100 00 O2 XXX XX TST TST gt CAL SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port atthe rear of the analyzer Wait until STABIL falls below 0 01 96 This may take several minutes y MPLE STABIL 100 00 02 XXX XX 5 TST TST CAL SETUP Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET amp SLOPE values for the measurements Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous lt TST TST gt ENTR CONC EXIT menu Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer v STABIL 100 00 O2 XXX XX 102 CAL STABIL 0 00 lt TST _TST gt ZERO CONC EXIT CAL STABIL 0 00 Wait until STABIL falls below 0 01 This may take several minutes lt TST gt CAL The SPAN button now appears during the transition from zero to span Press ENTR to changes 102 M P CAL STABIL 0 00 You may see both buttons the O
268. on range is 0 20 Section 9 5 1 for information on calibrating the CO 12 3 PNEUMATIC OPERATION CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE SAMPLE AIRFLOW SYSTEM IS BOTH LEAK TIGHT AND NOT PRESSURIZED OVER AMBIENT PRESSURE Regular leak checks should be performed on the analyzer as described in the maintenance schedule 10 1 Procedures for correctly performing leak checks can be found in Section 10 3 3 In pneumatic operation an internal pump evacuates the sample chamber creating a small vacuum that draws sample gas into the analyzer Normally the analyzer is operated with its inlet near ambient pressure either because the sample is directly drawn at the inlet or a small vent is installed at the inlet There are several advantages to this pull through configuration e First the pumping process heats and compresses the sample air complicating the measurement process Both heat and pressure affect the accuracy of paramagnetic measurements Additionally certain physical parts of the pump itself are made of materials that might chemically react with the sample gas 222 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Principles of Operation SAMPLE GAS INLET Particulate Filter EXHAUST GAS LER Flow Pressure SAMPLE Sensor PCA pressure SENSOR 1 1 Sample Gas Flow Contro
269. on when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty Refer to Section 13 for more information on preventing ESD damage In each instrument with the Multidrop option there is a shunt jumpering two pins on the serial Multidrop and LVDS printed circuit assembly PCA as shown in Figure 3 14 This shunt must be removed from all instruments except that designated as last in the multidrop chain which must remain terminated This requires powering off and opening each instrument and making the following adjustments 1 With NO power to the instrument remove its top cover and lay the rear panel open for access to the Multidrop LVDS PCA which is seated on the CPU 2 Onthe Multidrop LVDS PCA s JP2 connector remove the shunt that jumpers Pins 21 lt gt 22 as indicated in Figure 3 14 Do this for all but the last instrument in the chain where the shunt should remain at Pins 21 lt gt 22 3 Check that the following cable connections are made in all instruments again refer to Figure 3 14 J3on the Multidrop LVDS PCA to the CPU s COM1 connector Note that the CPU s COM2 connector is not used in Multidrop on the Multidrop LVDS PCA to J12 on the motherboard e J1on the Multidrop LVDS PCS to the front panel LCD 07275B DCN6418 43 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual JP2 has a shunt on Pins 21 22 Remove this shunt from all analyze
270. or Code DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels Analog Output Test Function Nominal Values Current Outputs Status Outputs Check Relay PCA Status LEDs Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION A 1 T802 Software Menu Trees 2 T802 Setup Variables for Serial I O A 3 T802 Warnings and Test Functions 4 T802 Signal I O Definitions A 5 T802 DAS Functions A 6 T802 Terminal Command Designators 7 802 MODBUS Register Map APPENDIX B T802 SPARE PARTS LIST APPENDIX C T802 REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE APPENDIX D T802 ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS xiv 07275B DCN6418 GENERAL INFORMATION AND SETUP 07275B DCN6418 Section 1 General Information Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank 16 07275B DCN6418 1 INTRODUCTION FEATURES AND OPTIONS 1 1 T802 OVERVIEW The Model T802 also referred to as T802 Paramagnetic Oxygen Analyzer is a microprocessor controlled analyzer that determines the concentration of molecular oxygen O in a sample gas drawn through the instrument It uses a paramagnetic sensor that relies on the relatively high reactivity of molecules to magnetic fields to generate a current that is proportional to the amount of O present in the sensor cha
271. output in lieu of the 07275B DCN6418 101 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual current meter see Figure 3 7 for pin assignments and diagram of the analog output connector This allows the use of a voltmeter connected across the resistor to measure converter output as VDC or mVDC Volt Meter DC OUT Recording ANALYZER Device Figure 5 4 Alternative Setup Using 2500 Resistor for Checking Current Output Signal Levels In this case follow the procedure above but adjust the output for the following values Table 5 7 Current Loop Output Check FS Voltage across Voltage across Resistor for 2 20 mA Resistor for 4 20 mA 0 500 mVDC 1000 mVDC 100 5000 mvDC 5000 mvDC 102 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 4 TURNING AN ANALOG OUTPUT OVER RANGE FEATURE ON OFF In its default configuration a 5 over range is available on each of the T802 s analog outputs This over range can be disabled if your recording device is sensitive to excess voltage or current To turn the over range feature on or off select the ANALOG CONFIGURATION submenu see Section 5 9 3 then press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET CAL Continue pressing SET until you reach the outpu
272. personal injury always use two persons to lift and carry the T802 CAUTION AVOID WARRANTY INVALIDATION Printed circuit assemblies PCAs are sensitive to electro static discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system Damage resulting from failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty See A Primer on Electro Static Discharge in this manual for more information on preventing ESD damage CAUTION AN Do not operate this instrument until removing dust plugs from SAMPLE and EXHAUST ports on the rear panel Note Teledyne API recommends that you store shipping containers materials for future use if when the instrument should be returned to the factory for repair and or calibration service See Warranty section in this manual and shipping procedures on our Website at http www teledyne api com 07275B DCN6418 23 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Verify that there is no apparent external shipping damage If damage has occurred please advise the shipper first then Teledyne API Included with your analyzer is a printed record of the final performance characterization performed on your instrument at the factory This record Final Test and Validation Data Sheet PN 068350000 is an important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument It should be placed in
273. properties Table 6 3 are viewable via the analyzer s front panel display 118 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Table 6 3 LAN Internet Configuration Properties PROPERTY DEFAULT STATE DESCRIPTION ON This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF DHCP Press EDIT and toggle ON for automatic configuration after first consulting network administrator INSTRUMENT This string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each e g IP ADDRESS 192 168 76 55 is the address of the analyzer itself Can only be edited when DHCP is set to OFF GATEWAY IP 0 0 0 0 A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP ADDRESS address e g 192 168 76 1 that is the address of the computer used by your LAN to access the Internet Can only be edited when DHCP is set to OFF Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each e g 255 255 252 0 that identifies the LAN to which the device 0 0 0 0 is connected SUBNET MASK All addressable devices and computers on a LAN must have the same subnet mask Any transmissions sent to devices with different subnets are assumed to be outside of the LAN and are routed through the gateway computer onto the Internet 3000 This number defines the terminal control port by which the TCP PORT instrument is addressed by terminal emulation software such as Internet or Teledyne API s APICOM T802 The name by which your analyzer will appear when H
274. put 3 DATA_OUT_3 Data output 3 TEST_OUTPUT 3 Test measurement output DATA_OUT_4 Data output 4 A 22 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A Signal Name Bit or Channel Description Number External analog input board default PC address 5C hex XIN1 7 0 External analog input 1 XIN2 7 1 External analog input 2 XIN3 7 2 External analog input 3 XIN47 3 External analog input 4 XIN5 7 4 External analog input 5 5 External analog input 6 XIN7 7 6 External analog input 7 XIN8 7 7 External analog input 8 T Series E Series 803 802 with option T Series E Series 801 or 803 MODBUS option T Series E Series 802 or 803 5 future 5 Future valve option T Series External analog input option 07275B DCN6418 A 23 Appendix Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 APPENDIX A 5 DAS Triggering Events Parameters Software Version s 1 0 3 T Series A 3 E Series Table A 5 DAS Trigger Events Name Description ATIMER Automatic timer expired EXO2ZR Exit zero calibration mode EXO2SP Exit Oe span calibration mode EXO2MP Exit Oe multi point calibration mode O2SLPC Oe slope and offset recalculated EXCO2Z Exit CO2 zero calibration mode EXCO 2S Exit COe span calibration mode EXCO2M Exit CO2 multi point ca
275. put 4 value Volts 1507 External analog input 4 slope eng unit V 1527 External analog input 4 offset eng unit 1547 External analog input 5 value Volts 1567 External analog input 5 slope eng unit V 1587 External analog input 5 offset eng unit 1607 External analog input 6 value Volts 1627 External analog input 6 slope eng unit V 1647 External analog input 6 offset eng unit 166 External analog input 7 value Volts 1687 External analog input 7 slope eng unit V 1707 External analog input 7 offset eng unit 1727 External analog input 8 value Volts 1747 External analog input 8 slope eng unit V 1767 External analog input 8 offset eng unit MODBUS Floating Point Holding Registers 32 bit IEEE 754 format read write in high word low word order read write 0 Maps to O2 TARG variable target conc for range 1 96 2 Maps to O2 TARG SPAN variable target conc for range 2 96 100 Maps to 2_ _ 1 variable target conc for range 1 96 102 Maps to CO2 TARG SPAN variable target conc for range 2 96 A 30 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A MODBUS Register Description Units Address dec 0 based MODBUS Discrete Input Registers single bit read only 0 Box temperature warning A cell temperature warning 2 Sample flow warning 3 Sample pressure warning 4 Sy
276. r certaines parties de l instrument sans protection ou sans les outils appropri s pourrait entrainer des dommages aux pi ces ou a l instrument Pictogramme technicien Toutes les op rations portant ce symbole doivent tre effectu es uniquement par du personnel de maintenance qualifi Mise la terre Ce symbole l int rieur de l instrument d termine le point central de la mise la terre s curitaire de l instrument MISE EN GARDE Cet instrument doit tre utilis aux fins d crites et de la mani re d crite dans ce manuel Si vous utilisez cet instrument d une autre mani re que celle pour laquelle il a t pr vu l instrument pourrait se comporter de facon impr visible et entrainer des cons quences dangereuses NE JAMAIS utiliser analyseur de gaz pour chantillonner des gaz combustibles 07275B DCN6418 WARRANTY WARRANTY POLICY 02024F COVERAGE Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation TAPI a business unit of Teledyne Instruments Inc provides that Prior to shipment TAPI equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested Should equipment failure occur TAPI assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime TAPI stands ready to provide on site or in plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers in the industry maintenance and the first level of field troubleshooting
277. r Pressure Sensor Flow Sensor e g CPU bus Pre Amplifiers amp Amplifiers Touchscreen MotherBoard etc AC HEATERS COOLING FAN S LOGIC DEVICES AC POWER DC POWER Solenoid Drivers RELAY PCA CO2 SENSOR when optional CO2 sensor installed PS2 12 VDC a r OPTIONAL 2 emm ON OFF SWITCH AC POWER IN Figure 12 13 Power Distribution Block Diagram 12 5 7 FRONT PANEL TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY INTERFACE Users can input data and receive information directly through the front panel touchscreen display The LCD display is controlled directly by the CPU board The touchscreen is interfaced to the CPU by means of a touchscreen controller that connects to the CPU via the internal USB bus and emulates a computer mouse 07275B DCN6418 235 Principles of Operation Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 98 104 70 16 4V 33v LVDS cpu Transmiter M LVDS 18 Bt TTL Da Bon Receh che LAN USB4 i cer USB Master gt Front Panel Interface PCA Powered Powered x x USB 1 USB 2 AIO Figure 12 14 Front Panel and Display Interface
278. r 0 ID 1 F 04 SR 1000 Alias 00040 COREF 2825489 0000007 1000003 4646791 4096 228 onz 0000202 4636 890 0000002 0000007 30 956089 051139 30 860850 1 000000 0 000009 1 000000 EL 0 960860 1 000000 0000207 30 980550 aua EXT For Help press 072758 DCN6418 127 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 6 5 2 HESSEN Note The Hessen protocol is a multidrop protocol in which several remote instruments are connected via a common communications channel to a host computer The remote instruments are regarded as slaves of the host computer The remote instruments are unaware that they are connected to a multidrop bus and never initiate Hessen protocol messages They only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they receive a command containing their own unique ID number The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things to obtain the status of remote instruments including the concentrations of all the gases measured and to place remote instruments into zero or span calibration or measure mode API s implementation supports both of these principal features The Hessen protocol is not well defined therefore while application is completely compatible with the protocol itself it may be different from implementations by other companies The following sections describe the basics for setting up yo
279. r performing configuration calibration reporting and diagnostics operations 5 1 SETUP gt CFG CONFIGURATION INFORMATION Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument s configuration information This display lists the analyzer model serial number firmware revision software library revision CPU type and other information e Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here e Use this information to identify the software and hardware installed in your T802 analyzer when contacting Technical Support To access the configuration table press RANGE 100 00 SETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT lt Press NEXT or PREV to scroll through the following list of Configuration information SETUP SUPPORT TELEDYNE API COM Press EXIT at any time to MODEL TYPE NUMBER AND NAME PREV NEXT anytime to PART NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SOFTWARE REVISION LIBRARY REVISION OSREVISION SETUP menyz 5 2 SETUP gt ACAL NOT USED ACAL on the primary SETUP menu is a special configuration Contact factory 5 3 SETUP gt DAS INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM Use the SETUP DAS menu to capture and record data Refer to Section 7 for configuration and operation details 07275B DCN6418 69 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 4 SETUP gt RNGE
280. revent lt of ADC reading Do pLace 100 x e Eran 1 1 vee DE vour N amp ET our av BASTO 00 HEV O15 uF commie RESISTOR AS GND ete R78 015 10 uF 35V TANTAL CLOSE AS 4 5 POSSIBLE TO eC VOLTAGE REF 10000158 WZ F 200R RSQQUUEIS Jota 39 100 alt Less quos eis Ter RAS 6 8 a 2 T licsra Dio BAST4 sj SHDN gt 1 vec EBBRBBRHMEE jak E geg 100K8 gt mL 2 0 E a gt E RDMBYTE me im m m 37 m m oo TE iJ pasooo ss us Is i Ls biz T meis xy sus I Xii CPLD cor p wo 10 39 mo TS Tess 4 ig Jum 6 Ej CIC M a Dt 5 um m _VEREAD gt D 8 ig mar OL 0 SD um 9 13 un m BOITE Schematic for E Scis Motherboard PCA PN 05802 a Naar Jeu ostos Dae sero CNIPCUMGRIESUTEFE 1 2 E a 6 07275B DCN6418 1 E 3 E s E Ivan D gt BYPASS CAP
281. rify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal program to any of the communications ports If the analyzer responds to remote commands and the display changes accordingly the touchscreen interface may be faulty 11 6 5 LCD DISPLAY MODULE Verify the functioning of the front panel display by observing it when power is applied to the instrument Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly the display screen should light and show the splash screen with logo and other indications of its state as the CPU goes through its initialization process 210 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Troubleshooting and Service 11 6 6 RELAY BOARD The relay board PCA 04135 can be most easily checked by observing the condition of the its status LEDs on the relay board as described in Section 12 5 4 1 and the associated output when toggled on and off through signal I O function in the diagnostic menu See Section 11 1 3 1 If the front panel display responds to key presses and D1 on the relay board is NOT flashing then either the wiring between the Keyboard and the relay board is bad or the relay board is bad 2 If D1 the relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question heater power etc toggles properly using the signal I O function then the associated control device on the relay board
282. rinciples of operation a primer on electrostatic discharge and a glossary The appendices at the end of the manual provide support information such as version specific software documentation lists of spare parts and recommended stocking levels and schematics Part numbers do not reflect real time updates contact Sales or Technical Support 07275B DCN6418 vii Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual ATTENTION IMPORTANT Note CONVENTIONS USED In addition to the safety symbols as presented in the Important Safety Information page this manual provides special notices related to the safety and effective use of the analyzer and other pertinent information Special Notices appear as follows COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY This special notice provides information to avoid damage to your instrument and possibly invalidate the warranty IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Could either affect accuracy of instrument readings or cause loss of data Pertinent information associated with the proper care operation or maintenance of the analyzer or its parts REVISION HISTORY T802 Operation and Maintenance Manual PN07275 Date Rev DCN Description 2013 January 14 B 6418 Administrative Updates and specs updates 2011 February 18 A 6005 Initial Release viii 07275B DCN6418 TABLE OF CONTENTS ABOUT TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUME
283. rm htr 043420000 2 sensor therm hir 041920000 P1 2 Motherboard 058021100 71 CO2THB CO2sensorthermJtr 041920000 Pi 1 Motherboard 058021100 CO2 11B Relay Board 045230100 Pi8 1 Cell Heater 040400000 CO2 12B Relay Board 045230100 P18 1 CO2 Cell Heater 040400000 CO231A Relay Board 045230100 218 2 CO2 Cell Heater 00400000 CO2TS2 Relay Board 045230100 P18 4 Cel Heater 040400000 CO2 12A Relay Board 045230100 18 5 CO2 Cell Heater 040400000 07275B DCN6418 D 3 0 4 80 Interconnect List Reference 0738001004 DCN6418 FROM TO Cable PN Signal Assembly PN J Pin Assembly PN dip Pim O2 SIGNAL 066470000 CBL CO2 amp 02 SENSORS DC PWR Motherboard 058021100 P109 1702 Sensor 1080000030 Bi Shield 12V RET Motherboard 002 Sensor 058021100 090000033 P109 Pi 9 GND Relay Board 045230100 iav 066830000 FLOW MODULE DGND 38V Sensor LCD Interface LCD Interface OP0000083 066970000 068970000 P1 P14 Pid L Relay Board 8 Relay Board Relay Board 045230100 045230100 045230100 48V TCD Interface 066970000 Relay Board 045230100 12V RET Relay Board 045230100
284. rnal Clock s Time and Day 5 6 2 Adjusting the Internal Clock s 5 7 SETUP gt MORE gt COMM Communication Port 07275B DCN6418 ix Table of Contents Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 71 ID Machine Identification 5 5 inneren ere 83 5 7 2 INET Ethernet 5 7 3 1 Mode Baude Rate and Test Port 5 8 SETUP MORE gt VARS Internal Variables 5 9 SETUP gt MORE gt DIAG Diagnostics Functions 5 9 1 Signal 5 9 2 Analog Output 5 9 3 Analog I O Configuration 5 9 4 Turning an Analog Output Over Range Feature ON OFF 5 9 5 Adding a Recorder Offset to an Analog Output 5 9 6 Selecting a Test Channel Function for Output A4 5 9 7 AIN Calibration 5 9 8 Analog Inputs XI Option Configuration 5 10 SETUP gt gt ALRM Using the Gas Concentration Alarms Option 61 5 10 1 Setting the T802 Option 61 Concentration Alarm Limits 6 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND OPERATION 6 1 Data Terminal Communication Equipment DTE DCE 6 2 Communication Modes Baud Rate and Port Testing 6 2 1 COM Port Communication Modes 6 2 2 COM Port Baud Rate 6 2 3 COM Port Testing 6 3 Remote Access via the Ethernet 6 3 1 Configuring the Ethernet Interface using DHCP 6 3 2 Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresse 6 4 USB Port for Remote Access 6 5 Communic
285. rnal pneumatics CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Always use a separate calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows in the 0 1000 cm min range to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer DO NOT use the built in flow measurement viewable from the Front Panel of the instrument This measurement is only for detecting major flow interruptions such as clogged or plugged gas lines 1 Attach the Flow Meter to the SAMPLE inlet port on the rear panel Figure 3 4 Ensure that the inlet to the Flow Meter is at atmospheric pressure 2 Sample flow should be 120 10 3 Once an accurate measurement has been recorded by the method described above adjust the analyzer s internal flow sensors See Section 9 4 2 Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway typically a plugged sintered filter or critical flow orifice in one of the analyzer s flow control assemblies High flows indicate leaks downstream of the Flow Control Assembly 192 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures 10 3 5 CLEANING THE OPTICAL BENCH The T802 sensor assembly and optical bench are complex and delicate Disassembly and cleaning is not recommended Please check with the factory before disassembling the optical bench 10 3 6 CLEANING EXTERIOR SURFACES OF THE T802 If necessary the exterior surfaces of the T802 can be cleaned
286. rocedures for each sensor 1 Verify the Reporting Range settings as presented in Section 3 4 3 1 While it is possible to perform the following procedure with any range setting we recommend that you perform this initial checkout using the following reporting range settings e Mode Setting SNGL Analog Output Reporting Range 20 95 default displays 100 00 2 If the Dilution Ratio Option is enabled on your T802 perform the Dilution Ratio set up as presented in Section 3 4 3 2 3 Set the expected Span Gas Concentration for O2 as presented in Section 3 4 3 3 This should be 80 of concentration range for which the analyzer s analog output range is set 4 Perform the Zero Span point calibration presented in Section 3 4 3 4 The basic analyzer is now ready for operation However if your T802 is equipped with the optional CO sensor this sensor should be calibrated during installation 07275B DCN6418 55 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual of the instrument to finish readying the analyzer for operation See Section 9 5 for instructions Once you have completed the above set up procedures please fill out the Quality Questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it to Teledyne API This information is vital to our efforts in continuously improving our service and our products THANK YOU Note 56 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic
287. roperly installed the chassis ground of your analyzer is tied to earth ground and its electronic components are prevented from building static electric charges themselves This does not prevent discharges from static fields built up on other things like you and your clothing from discharging through the instrument and damaging it 13 4 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF STATIC CONTROL It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges It is not however difficult to prevent those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent damage due to electro static discharge from occurring 13 4 1 GENERAL RULES Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station Setting up an ESD safe workstation need not be complicated A protective mat properly tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is needed to create a basic anti ESD workstation Protective Mat Stra Ground Point Figure 13 2 Basic Anti ESD Workbench For technicians that work in the field special lightweight and portable anti ESD kits are available from most suppliers of ESD protection gear These include everything needed to create a temporary anti ESD work area anywhere e Always wear an Anti ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic assemblies of your analyzer An anti ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it at or near the same potential as other grounded objects in the work area and allows stat
288. rough the EXAMPLE reaction cell SETUP X X O2 DIL FACTOR 10 0 Gain 0 0 0 1 0 0 ENTREXI m SETUP X X CO2 DIL FACTOR 1 0 Gain EXIT ignores Only appears if the new setting optional CO sensor 1 0 ENTREXI is installed ENTR accepts the new setting J7 58 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 3 4 3 3 SET SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION Set the expected O span gas concentration This should be 80 of concentration range for which the analyzer s analog output range is set The O span concentration value is automatically default to 20 95 If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the O calibration SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 CAL ALZ 2 n SAMPLE GAS TO CAL 02 Only appears if either the optional sensor 02 2 ENTR EXIT is installed SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL RNG1 Only appears if the RNG1 RNG2 ENTR EXI gt analyzer is set for DUAL range mode 02 M P CAL RANGE 100 01 2 lt TST TST gt ZERO SPAN CONC O2 CAL 02 SPAN CONC 20 95 0 2 0 9 5 EXIT ignores the new ENTR gt setting and returns to the previous display ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the CONCENTRATION MENU 07275B DCN6418 59 Secti
289. rror in designing the DAS script or calculate the number of records using the DAS or APICOM manuals 07275B DCN6418 151 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual To set the NUMBER OF RECORDS follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 RS232 EDIT PRNT EXIT ISETUP X X PREV NEXT INS DEL Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be edited a ISETUP NAME CONC SET gt EDIT Continue pressing SET or SET until SETUP X X NUMBER OF RECORDS 4032 SET SET gt EDIT SETUP X X EDIT PARAMS DELETE DATA YES deletes all data YES NO data currently stored for returns NO retains the and to the this data channel and previous continues into EDIT mei mode SETUP NUMBER OF RECORDS 4032 0 0 4 0 3 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to set the Number of Records to record 0 100 000 nu EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting 77 152 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 7 1 4 7 RS 232 REPORT FUNCTION The DAS can automatically report data to the communications ports where they can be captured with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed
290. rs except the last analyzer in the chain leave the shunt installed on Pins 21 22 on the Disk on Module last analyzer DOM Adjust accordingly if new instrument s added later IL 224 924 21 923 JPZ Serial multi drop H 1 and LVDS board seated on CPU a J4 to 12 on motherboard 000000005000000000000 D 2000 Video cable to front panel LCD CPU COM1 CPU 2 is not in Multi J11 connector Mieten Figure 3 14 Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode Note If you are adding an instrument to the end of a previously configured chain remove the shunt between Pins 21 lt gt 22 of JP2 on the Multidrop LVDS PCA in the instrument that was previously the last instrument in the chain 4 5 Close the instrument Referring to Figure 3 15 use straight through DB9 male gt DB9 female cables to interconnect the host RS232 port to the first analyzer s RS232 port then from the first analyzer s COM2 port to the second analyzer s RS232 port from the second analyzer s COM2 port to the third analyzer s RS232 port etc connecting in this fashion up to eight analyzers subject to the distance limitations of the RS 232 standard On the rear panel of each analyzer adjust the DCE DTE switch so that the green and the red LEDs RX and TX of the COM1 connector labeled RS232 are both lit Ensure you are using the correct RS 232 cables
291. rs long used for Internet and LAN communications 60D USB Cable for direct connection between instrument rear panel USB port and personal computer Concentration Alarm Relay Issues warning when gas concentration exceeds limits set by user 61 Four 4 dry contact relays on the rear panel of the instrument This relay option is different from and in addition to the Contact Closures that come standard on all TAPI instruments Section 3 3 1 7 RS 232 Multidrop Enables communications between host computer and up to eight analyzers 62 Multidrop card seated on the analyzer s CPU card Each instrument in the multidrop network requires this card and a communications cable Option 60B Section 3 3 1 8 07275B DCN6418 19 Introduction Features and Options Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Option Option Description Notes Reference Number USB COM Port 64 Separate option if instrument not configured with Option 64B analog Sections 3 3 1 8 and inputs Disabled when using Multidrop or RS 485 communication 6 4 Second Gas Sensor Sections 9 5 12 2 i 20 67 Carbon Dioxide CO2 Sensor 0 20 12 24 and 12 3 1 Special Features Built in features software activated Maintenance Mode Switch located inside the instrument places the analyzer in maintenance mode where it can continue sampling yet ignore calibration diagnostic and reset
292. rt etc 7 1 1 DAS CHANNELS The key to the flexibility of the DAS is its ability to store a large number of combinations of triggering events and data parameters in the form of data channels Users may create up to 50 data channels and each channel can contain one or more parameters For each channel the following are selected e triggering event is selected e Up to 50 data parameters which can be the shared between channels e Several other properties that define the structure of the channel and allow the user to make operational decisions regarding the channel 07275B DCN6418 139 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Table 7 2 DAS Data Channel Properties DEFAULT PROPERTY DESCRIPTION SETTING SETTING RANGE NAME The name of the data channel NONE Up to 6 letters or digits TRIGGERING The event that triggers the data channel to measure ATIMER Any available event EVENT and store the datum see Appendix A 5 NUMBER AND User configurable list of data types to be 1 Any available parameter LIST OE ded hi dix 5 PARAMETERS recorded in any given channel see Appendix A 5 3 000 00 01 to REPORT PERIOD The amount of time between each channel data 000 01 00 366 23 59 point 1 hour Days Hours Minutes NUMBER OF The number of reports that will be stored in the data 1 to 30 000 max limited file
293. s when long setting from the RS 232 interface RS232 MODE2 BitFlag 0 0 65535 RS 232 COM2 mode flags Same settings as RS232 MODE BAUD RATE2 19200 300 RS 232 COM baud rate 1200 Enclose value in double quotes i when setting from the RS 232 2400 interface 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 MODEM INIT2 amp 00 Any character RS 232 COM2 modem amp HO amp 10 S0 2 in the allowed initialization string Sent verbatim amp BO amp N6 amp MO character set plus carriage return to modem on E0 Q1 amp Wo Up to 100 power up or manually Enclose characters value in double quotes when long setting from the RS 232 interface RS232 PASS Password 940331 0 999999 RS 232 log on password MACHINE 10 ID 802 0 9999 Unique ID number for instrument COMMAND PROMPT Omd Any character RS 232 interface command in the allowed prompt Displayed only if enabled character set with RS232 MODE variable Up to 100 Enclose value in double quotes characters when setting from the RS 232 long interface TEST CHAN ID NONE NONE Diagnostic analog output ID Enclose value in double quotes SAMPLE when setting from the RS 232 PRESSURE interface SAMPLE FLOW O2 CELL TEMP 3 CO2 CELL TEMP CHASSIS TEMP 07275B DCN6418 Appendix Models T802 802 Appendix Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Setup Variable Numeric Default Value Range
294. s commands via a series of relays and switches located on a separate printed circuit assembly called the relay PCA to control the function of key electromechanical devices such as heaters The relay PCA receives instructions in the form of digital signals over the bus interprets these digital instructions and activates its various switches and relays appropriately The relay PCA is located in the right rear quadrant of the analyzer and is mounted vertically on the backside of the same bracket as the instrument s DC power supplies 07275B DCN6418 229 Principles of Operation Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Thermocouple Status LED s Signal Output 02 through D16 Watchdog JP5 Status LED D1 Thermocouple Configuration Jumpers DC Power Supply Test Points Connector Connection for DC JP7 1 Heaters Pump AC 2 Configuration j j Valve Control Jumper Drivers Pump Power Output Valve Control Connector Connector for AC Relays K4 amp K5 DC Power Distribution Connector for AC Relays K4 amp 5 Connectors Figure 12 10 Relay PCA Layout PN 04135 CAUTION ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Only those relays actually required by the configuration of the T802 are populated A protective retainer plate is installed over the AC power relays to keep them securely seated in their sockets and prevent
295. s only 801 803 or 802 with CO option 802 with CO option or 803 802 or 803 801 or 803 802 only analog input option E Series internet option 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A APPENDIX A 3 Warnings and Test Measurements Software Versions 1 0 3 T Series A 3 E Series Table A 2 Warning Messages Name Message Text Description Warnings WSYSRES SYSTEM RESET Instrument was power cycled or the CPU was reset WDATAINIT DATA INITIALIZED Data storage was erased WCOMFIGINIT CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased WO2ALARM1 O2 ALARM 1 WARN Oe concentration alarm limit 1 exceeded WO2ALARM2 O2 ALARM 2 WARN Oe concentration alarm limit 2 exceeded WCO2ALARM1 CO2 ALARM 1 WARN CO concentration alarm limit 1 exceeded WCO2ALARM2 CO2 ALARM 2 WARN CO concentration alarm limit 2 exceeded WSAMPFLOW SAMPLE FLOW WARN Sample flow outside of warning limits specified by FLOW SET variable WSAMPPRESS SAMPLE PRESS WARN Sample pressure outside of warning limits specified by SAMP PRESS SET variable WBOXTEMP BOX TEMP WARNING Chassis temperature outside of warning limits specified by BOX SET variable WO2CELLTEMP O2 CELL TEMP WARN sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits specif
296. s the average and the number of samples used to compute the value of the parameter This property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used Note that the number of samples is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be specified only for one of the parameters in that channel Users can build a channel by selecting desired parameters from the available choices Data channels can be edited individually from the front panel without affecting other data channels However when editing a data channel such as during adding deleting or editing parameters all data for that particular channel will be lost because the DAS can store only data of one format number of parameter columns etc for any given channel In addition a DAS configuration can only be uploaded remotely as an entire set of channels Hence remote update of the DAS will always delete all current channels and stored data To modify add or delete a parameter follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press 07275B DCN6418 147 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU DAS EDIT Keypad Functions ISETUP XX 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 RS232 Button FUNCTION NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT PREV Selects the previous data channel or parameter NEX
297. span gas with the two stage regulator adjusted to less than 15 psi with a shutoff valve and pressure gauge 07275B DCN6418 191 Maintenance Schedule amp Procedures Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual CAUTION A GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Do not use bubble solution with vacuum applied to the analyzer The solution may contaminate the instrument Do not exceed 15 PSI pressure 1 Turn OFF power to the instrument 2 Install a leak checker or tank of gas as described above on the SAMPLE inlet atthe rear panel 3 Remove the instrument cover and locate the inlet side of the sample pump Remove the flow assembly from the pump and plug it with the appropriate gas tight fitting 4 Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker allowing enough time to fully pressurize the instrument through the critical flow orifice Do not exceed 15 psi pressure Check each fitting with soap bubble solution looking for bubbles Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution do not re apply vacuum as it will suck soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it Wipe down and thoroughly dry all parts first 5 Once the leak has been located and repaired the leak down rate should be 1 in Hg 0 4 psi in 5 minutes after the pressure is shut off 10 3 4 PERFORMING A SAMPLE FLOW CHECK HAZARD STRONG OXIDIZER ONLY Perform Leak Checks using N gas and after thoroughly purging the analyzer s inte
298. ss ENTR Change Machine ID if needed see Slave ID USB RS232 Using the front panel menu go to SETUP MORE COMM 2 EDIT scroll through the COM2 EDIT submenu until the display shows COM2 MODBUS RTU OFF press OFF to change the setting to ON Scroll NEXT to COM2 MODBUS ASCII and ensure it is set to OFF Press ENTR to keep the new settings If RTU is not available with your communications equipment set the COM2 MODBUS ASCII setting to ON and ensure that COM2 MODBUS RTU is set to OFF Press ENTR to keep the new settings If your analyzer is connected to a network with at least one other analyzer of the same model unique Slave ID must be assigned to each Using the front panel menu go to SETUP MORE COMM ID The MACHINE ID default is the same as the model number Toggle the menu buttons to change the ID Reboot analyzer For the settings to take effect power down the analyzer wait 5 seconds and power up the analyzer Make appropriate cable connections Connect your analyzer either via its Ethernet or USB port to a PC this may require a USB to RS232 adapter for your if so also install the software driver from the CD supplied with the adapter and reboot the computer if required or via its COM2 port to null modem this may require a null modem adapter or cable Specify MODBUS software settings examples used here are for MODBUS Poll software 1 Click Setup Re
299. ss of all DAS data it may also cause loss of some instrument configuration parameters unless the replacement DOM carries the exact same firmware version Whenever changing the version of installed software the memory must be reset Failure to ensure that memory is reset can cause the analyzer to malfunction and invalidate measurements After the memory is reset the A D converter must be re calibrated and all information collected in Step 1 below must be re entered before the instrument will function correctly Also zero and span calibration should be performed 1 Document all analyzer parameters that may have been changed such as range auto cal analog output serial port and other settings before replacing the DOM 216 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Troubleshooting and Service Turn off power to the instrument fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting screws When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer locate the Disk on Module in the right most socket of the CPU board The DOM should carry a label with firmware revision date and initials of the programmer Remove the nylon standoff clip that mounts the DOM over the CPU board and lift the DOM off the CPU Do not bend the connector pins Install the new Disk on Module making sure the notch at the end of the chip matches the notch in the socket It may be necessary to straighten th
300. ssen Status Flag Assignments DEFAULT BIT STATUS FLAG NAME ASSIGNMENT WARNING FLAGS SAMPLE FLOW WARNING 0001 INVALID CONC The instrument s front panel display will show the 0080 concentration as Warnings OPERATIONAL FLAGS In MANUAL Calibration Mode 0200 In O ZERO Calibration Mode 0400 In CO ZERO Calibration Mode 0400 In O SPAN Calibration Mode 0800 In CO SPAN Calibration Mode 0800 UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS UGM 0000 MGM 2000 PPB 4000 PPM 6000 0001 0002 0004 SPARE UNUSED BITS 0008 0010 0020 0040 0100 1000 8000 UNASSIGNED FLAGS 0000 BOX TEMP WARNING O2 CONC ALARM 2 02 CELL TEMP WARN ANALOG CAL WARNING CO2 CELL TEMP WARN CAL MP 02 SAMPLE PRESS WARN CAL MP CO2 RELAY BOARD WARN REAR BOARD NOT DET CANNOT DYN SPAN SYSTEM RESET CANNOT DYN ZERO CO2 CONC ALARM 1 O2 CONC ALARM 1 CO2 CONC ALARM 2 1 These status flags are standard for all instruments and should probably not be modified Only applicable if the analyzer is equipped with an alarm option It is possible to assign more than one flag to the same Hessen status bit This allows the grouping of similar flags such as all temperature warnings under the same status bit Be careful not to assign conflicting flags to the same bit as each status bit will be triggered if any of the assigned flags is active While these units are assigned flags they are not
301. stem Status Data Autonomic Systems Diagnostic Routines ANALYZER HARDWARE Interface Handling Measurement Sensor Input Data Display Messages Algorithm Touchscreen Analog Output Data PC 104 BUS RS232 amp RS485 External Digital Linearization Table Figure 12 15 Basic Software Operation 12 5 9 ADAPTIVE FILTER The T802 software processes the O concentration signal after it is digitized by the motherboard through an adaptive filter built into the software Unlike other analyzers that average the output signal over a fixed time period the T802 averages over a set number of samples where each sample is 1 second This is technique is known as boxcar averaging During operation the software automatically switches between two different length filters based on the conditions at hand Once triggered the short filter remains engaged for a fixed time period to prevent chattering During conditions of constant or nearly constant concentration the software by default computes an average of the last 60 samples or 1 minute This provides the calculation portion of the software with smooth stable readings If a rapid change in concentration is detected the filter switches to 10 samples or 10 seconds measurement moving average to allow the analyzer to respond more quickly 07275B DCN6418 237 Principles o
302. stem reset warning 5 Rear board communication warning 6 Relay board communication warning T Front panel communication warning 8 Analog calibration warning 9 Dynamic zero warning 10 Dynamic span warning 11 Invalid concentration 12 In Oe zero calibration mode 13 In Oe span calibration mode 14 In O2 multi point calibration mode 15 System is OK same meaning as SYSTEM OK I O signal 16 Oe concentration alarm limit 1 exceeded 17 O concentration alarm limit 2 exceeded 18 In Hessen manual mode 100 CO cell temperature warning 101 In zero calibration mode 102 In COz span calibration mode 103 COz multi point calibration mode 104 CO concentration alarm limit 1 exceeded 105 CO concentration alarm limit 2 exceeded A 31 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 MODBUS Register Description Units Address dec 0 based MODBUS Coil Registers single bit read write 0 Maps to relay output signal 36 MB RELAY 36 in signal I O list 1 Maps to relay output signal 37 MB RELAY 37 signal I O list 2 Maps to relay output signal 38 MB RELAY 38 signal I O list 3 Maps to relay output signal 39 MB RELAY 39 signal I O list 20 3 Triggers zero calibration of range 1 on enters cal off exits cal 21 84 Triggers Oe span calibration of range 1 on enters cal off exits cal
303. ster Map Software Versions 1 0 3 T Series A 3 E Series 29 1 072758 DCN6418 Appendix Models T802 802E Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 This page intentionally left blank A 2 07275B DCN6418 Models T802 802 Appendix A Menu Trees Reference 06530C DCN6418 Appendix A APPENDIX A 1 Software Menu Trees Software Versions 1 0 3 T Series A 3 E Series SAMPLE TEST CAL 56 CLR SETUP 1 1 m 1 1 IST TST 02 C02 Presto cycle 1 through the active warning 1 RANGE Value LOW messages O2 RN1 Value 1 alue 9e Press to CC Value clear an STABIL Value active PRES Value IN HG A ZERO SPAN warning SAMP FL ValueJCC M messages O2 SLOPE Value O2 OFFSET Value MV 02 co2 CO2 SLOPE Valuef CO2 OFFSET Value MV PRIMARY SETUP O2 CELL TEMP ValuePC MENU CO2 CELL TEMP ValuePC BOX TEMP ValuePC e TIME HH MM SS CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE 1 Only appears when warning messages are active Only appears if analyzer is equipped with sensor option SECONDARY 3 Only appears on units with alarm option enabled SETUP MENU 4 Only appears if the Range Mode is set of DUAL or AUTO 5 Only appears if analog output A4 is actively reporting a TEST FUNCTION ACAL is a special configuration consult factory COMM VARS DIAG ALAR Figure A 1 B
304. t and slope of the response ON OFF OFF Special configuration When performing a zero point calibration during an AutoCal 1 OFF consult factory 4 DYN SPAN Automatically adjusts offset and slope of the response ON OFF OFF Special configuration when performing a zero point calibration during an AutoCal I 1 consult factory Allows the user to set the number of significant digits to the AUTO 1 2 5 CONC PRECISION right of the decimal point display of concentration and 3 4 Dur AUTO stability values Adjusts the speed of the analyzer s clock Choose the 60 to 60 sign if the clock is too slow choose the sign if the clock is sec 6 CLOCK ADJ ign if the clock is t hi th ign if the clock 0 s day too fast Pressing the OFF button to display SERVICE_CLEAR ON followed by pressing ENTR resets the service interval timer 7 SERVICE CLEAR and returns this Var back to its default setting ready for the ON OFF OFF next reset Displays time in hours since last service restarted by the 8 TIME_SINCE_SVC SERVICE_CLEAR Variable 0 50 000 0 9 SVC INTERVAL Sets the interval in hours between service reminders 0 100 000 0 1 This VAR only appears if the optional sensor is installed 86 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual To access and navigate the VARS menu use the following key sequence ISAMPLE RANGE 100 00 02 XXX XX SETUP
305. t be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device Manual calibration requires the AUTOCAL feature to be disabled 94 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 3 3 ENABLING OR DISABLING THE AUTOCAL FOR AN INDIVIDUAL ANALOG OUTPUT To enable or disable the AutoCal feature for an individual analog output elect the ANALOG I O CONFIGURATION submenu see Section 5 9 3 then press NOTE ANALOG OUTPUTS configured for 0 1V full scale should always be calibrated manually Toggle to turn AUTO CAL ONor OFF OFF manual calibration mode From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU IDIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET gt CAL EXIT 1 Continue pressing SET until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V OVR NOCAL SET SET gt EDIT EXIT Y DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE 5V SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET gt until DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 AUTO CAL ON SET SET EDIT EXIT Y ENTR accepts DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 AUTO CAL ON the setting new setting DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 AUTO CAL OFF OFF ENTR EXIT 07275B DCN6418 95 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Para
306. t by the user see Section 5 9 6 to output any one of the parameters accessible through the TST TST gt buttons of the unit s Sample display To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and or data logger to the appropriate analog output connections on the rear panel of the analyzer ANALOG OUT A1 A2 A3 A4 Figure 3 7 Analog Output Connector Table 3 5 Analog Output Pin Outs PIN ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE SIGNAL CURRENT SIGNAL 1 V Out l Out A1 2 Ground Out 3 V Out l Out A2 4 Ground 1 Out 5 V Out Only used if CO2 6 sensor is installed Ground Out Li V Out NA A4 8 Ground NA 3 3 1 4 CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS OPTION 41 SETUP This option adds isolated voltage to current conversion circuitry to the analyzer s analog outputs If your analyzer had this option installed at the factory there are no further connections to be made Otherwise it can be installed as a retrofit for each of the analog outputs of the analyzer This option converts the DC voltage analog output to a current signal with 0 20 mA output current The outputs can be scaled to any set of limits within that 0 20 mA range However most current loop applications call for either 2 20 mA or 4 20 mA range All current loop outputs have 5 over range Ranges with the lower limit set to more than 1 mA e g 2 20 or 4 20 mA also have
307. t for 230 VAC and is plugged into 115VAC or 100VAC the sample pump will not start and the heaters will not come up to temperature e Ifthe unit is set for 115 or 100 VAC and is plugged into a 230 VAC circuit the circuit breaker built into the ON OFF Switch on the Front Panel will trip to the OFF position immediately after power is switched on 11 6 2 DC POWER SUPPLY If you have determined that the analyzer s AC mains power is working but the unit is still not operating properly there may be a problem with one of the instrument s switching power supplies The supplies can have two faults namely no DC output and noisy output To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems the wiring used to connect the various printed circuit assemblies and DC Powered components and the associated test points on the relay board follow a standard color coding scheme as defined in the following table Table 11 5 DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Codes NAME TEST POINT TP AND WIRE COLOR Dgnd 1 Black 5V 2 Red Agnd 3 Green 15V 4 Blue 15V 5 Yellow 12V Ret ground 6 Purple 12V 7 Orange A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct per the values in the table below and an oscilloscope in AC mode with band limiting turned on can be used to evaluate if the supplies are producing excessive noise gt 100 mV p p 07275B DCN6418 209 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne
308. t panel menu but is available via the instrument s communication ports by using APICOM or the analyzer s standard serial data protocol 07275B DCN6418 155 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 7 1 4 11 DISABLING ENABLING DATA CHANNELS Data channels can be temporarily disabled which can reduce the read write wear on the disk on module To disable a data channel follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 RS232 PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Press PREV and NEXT to scroll to the DATA CHANNEL to be edited SETUPXX NAME CONC 807 SET EDIT Continue pressing SET or SET until SETUP CHANNEL ENABLE ON lt SET SET EDIT EXIT SETUP X X CHANNEL ENABLE ON ON ENTR EXIT Toggle to enable or disable the CHANNEL EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting 156 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne 7802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 7 2 REMOTE DAS CONFIGURATION The DAS can be configured and operated remotely via either the APICOM interface or a terminal emulation program Refer to Section 8 of this manual for details on remote operation of the T802 analyzer 7 2 1 DAS CONFIGURATION VIA APICOM Figure 7 2 shows an example of
309. t to be configured DIAG AIO OUT 2 5V OVR NOCAL SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 RANGE 5V SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO OUT 2 OVERRANGE ON SET SET EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO ON OUT 2 OVERRANGE ON Toggle to turn the Over ENTR EXIT Range feature ON OFF DIAG AIO OFF ENTR EXIT CONC OUT 2 OVERRANGE OFF 07275B DCN6418 103 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 5 ADDING A RECORDER OFFSET TO AN ANALOG OUTPUT Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal be significantly different from the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the zero point This can be achieved in the T802 by defining a zero offset a small voltage e g 10 of span To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel select the ANALOG CONFIGURATION submenu see Section 5 9 3 then press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED NO SET CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 5V OVR NOCAL SET SET gt EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO CONC OUT 2 OUTPUT 5V SET EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET until DIAG OUT
310. tage or current loop outputs to a strip chart recorder and or a data logger CONTROL IN For remotely activating the zero and span calibration modes ALARM Option for concentration alarms and system warnings ETHERNET Connector for network or Internet remote communication using Ethernet cable ANALOG IN Option for external voltage signals from other instrumentation and for logging these signals USB Option for direct connection to personal computer using USB com cable 30 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual REAR CPU Card Motherboard Gas Inlets Outlets Fan C Power Receptacle Co Sensor 2 option 5 VDC 15 VDC PS1 12 VDC O Sensor Pump Assy option Particulate Filter On Off Switch and Circuit Breaker FRONT Figure 3 5 Internal Layout 07275B DCN6418 31 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 3 3 CONNECTIONS AND SETUP This section presents the electrical Section 3 3 1 and pneumatic Section 3 3 2 connections for setup and preparing for instrument operation 3 3 1 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Note To maintain compliance with EMC standards it is required that the cable length be no greater than 3 meters for all connections which include Analog In Analog Out St
311. tandard plastic packaging materials to touch the electronic component assembly directly This includes but is not limited to plastic bubble pack Styrofoam peanuts open cell foam closed cell foam and adhesive tape DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer Use ONLY anti ESD tape Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti ESD bag or bin 1 Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate e f you are at the instrument rack hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point f you are at an anti ESD workbench lay the container down on the conductive work surface In either case wait several seconds 2 Place the item in the container Seal the container If using a bag fold the end over and fastening it with anti ESD tape e Folding the open end over isolates the component s inside from the effects of static fields Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device Note If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti ESD bags or containers available Teledyne API s Technical Support department will supply them see Section 11 9 for contact information Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation 246 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer
312. te the TEST Channel and select a function in this example SAMPLE PRESSURE press 07275B DCN6418 105 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual SETUP X X CFG ACAL DAS SETUP X X COMM SETUP X X Toggle these buttons to enter the correct PASSWORD PREV PREV Toggle these buttons to choose a mass flow controller TEST channel PREV RANGE 100 00 O2 XXX XX SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU PASS MORE EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU VARS DIAG ENTER PASSWORD 818 ENTR EXIT SIGNAL NEXT TEST CHAN OUTPUT NEXT ENTR TEST CHAN NONE TEST CHANNEL SAMPLE PRESSURE EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting NEXT ENTR EXIT The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 106 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 5 9 7 AIN CALIBRATION Perform Service This is the sub menu to conduct a calibration of the T802 analyzer s analog inputs This calibration should only be necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU motherboard or power supplies To perform an analog input calibration select the ANALOG CONFIGURATION submenu see Section 5 9 3 then press From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EX DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBR
313. ternal data acquisition system DAS SETUP mode has a Primary and a Secondary setup menu Note Any changes made to a variable during one of the SETUP procedures are not acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR button is pressed If the EXIT button is pressed before the ENTR button the analyzer will beep to notify the user that the newly entered value has been lost Setup Mode can be protected by password security through the SETUP gt PASS menu Section 5 5 to prevent unauthorized or inadvertent configuration adjustments 4 4 1 PRIMARY SETUP MENU For a visual representation of the software menu trees refer to Appendix 1 The areas accessible under the SETUP mode are shown below Table 6 4 Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions MENU MANUAL MODE OR FEATURE ITEM DESCRIPTION SECTION Analyzer Configuration Lists key hardware and software configuration information 5 1 Auto Cal Feature ACAL Special configuration consult factory 11 9 Internal Data Acquisition DAS Used to set up the DAS system and view recorded data 7 Analog Output Reporting RNGE Used to configure the output signals generated by the 54 Range Configuration instruments Analog outputs Calibration Password PASS Turns the calibration password feature ON OFF 5 5 Security Internal Clock Configuration CLK Used to Set or adjust the instrument s internal clock 5 6 This button accesses the instrument s secondary setup See Advanc
314. through for the RS 232 and RS 485 signals 12 5 6 1 A TO D CONVERSION Analog signals such as the voltages received from the analyzer s various sensors are converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter A D Under the control of the CPU this 232 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual Principles of Operation functional block selects a particular signal input e g BOX TEMP and then converts the selected voltage into a digital word The A D consists of a voltage to frequency V F converter a programmable logic device PLD three multiplexers several amplifiers and some other associated devices The V F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage The PLD counts the output of the V F during a specified time period and sends the result of that count in the form of a binary number to the CPU The A D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the T802 the A D is used in uni polar mode with a 5 V full scale The converter includes a 1 over and under range This allows signals from 0 05 V to 5 05 V to be fully converted For calibration purposes two reference voltages are supplied to the A D converter Reference Ground and 4 096 VDC During calibration the device measures these two voltages outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU The CPU uses these values to compute
315. tic influences and will be detected by the T802 s paramagnetic sensor Usually this influence is extremely minor and can be disregarded however several gases such as Nitrogen dioxide NO and Nitric oxide NO have strong enough paramagnetic properties to be of concern If the Sample Gas to be measured contains high levels of these gases the gases used for both the zero point calibration and the span calibration should contain the same components in the same proportion in order to cancel any interference effects Performing calibrations with Oz mixed in in such applications could induce significant errors into the measurements 3 3 2 4 BASIC PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS IMPORTANT See Figure 3 4 for the location and descriptions of the various pneumatic inlets outlets referred to in this section See Section 3 3 2 for information regarding the pneumatic setup of T802 analyzer IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with Stainless Steel PTFE Teflon tubing glass or electroless nickel 07275B DCN6418 47 Section 11 Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual ATTENTION COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY Remove dust plugs from rear panel exhaust and supply line fittings before powering on operating instrument These plugs should be kept for reuse in the event of future storage or shipping to prevent debris from entering t
316. tion as these values change with time The internal data acquisition system DAS is a convenient way to record and track these changes Use APICOM to download and review this data from a remote location Table 10 3 Predictive uses for Test Functions FUNCTION CONDITION BEHAVIOR INTERPRETATION STABIL O Zero Cal Increasing e Pneumatic Leaks instrument amp sample system creasing 3 4 Pneumatic Leak between sample inlet and Sample Cell 9 Change in sampling manifold PRES Sample Dirty particulate filter Decreasing 1 e Pneumatic obstruction between sample inlet and 9 e Obstruction in sampling manifold increase Pneumatic Leaks OFFSET Zero Cal 9 Contaminated zero gas Decreasing e Contaminated zero gas tenda e Pneumatic Leaks instrument amp sample system SLOPE Span Cal 9 e Calibration system deteriorating Decreasing e Calibration system deteriorating 10 3 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The following procedures are to be performed periodically as part of the standard maintenance of the T802 10 3 1 REPLACING THE SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or contamination We recommend that when you change the filter handle it and the wetted surfaces of the filter housing as little as possible Do not touch any part of the housing filter element PTFE retaining ring glass cover and the o ring 07275B DCN641
317. to the relay board 12 5 6 8 POWER UP CIRCUIT This circuit monitors the 5V power supply during start up and sets the Analog outputs external digital I O ports and circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the instrument software can establish control 12 5 6 9 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER The analyzer operates on 100 VAC 115 VAC or 230 VAC power at either 50Hz or 60Hz Individual units are set up at the factory to accept any combination of these five attributes As illustrated in Figure 12 13 power enters the analyzer through a standard IEC 320 power receptacle located on the rear panel of the instrument From there it is routed through the On Off switch located in the lower right corner of the Front Panel A 6 75 Amp circuit breaker is built into the ON OFF Switch AC power is distributed directly to the sample gas pump AC Line power is stepped down and converted to DC power by two DC power supplies One supplies 12 VDC while a second supply provides 5 VDC and 15 VDC for logic and analog circuitry All DC voltages are distributed via the relay board CAUTION GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD Should the AC power circuit breaker trip investigate and correct the condition causing this situation before turning the analyzer back on 234 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Principles of Operation SENSOR SUITES ANALOG SENSORS e g Temp Senso
318. transfer procedure The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this mode are listed in Table 8 1 and in Appendix A 8 2 1 1 HELP COMMANDS IN INTERACTIVE MODE Table 8 1 Terminal Mode Software Commands COMMAND Function Control T Switches the analyzer to terminal mode echo edit If mode flags 1 amp 2 are OFF the interface can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program Control C Switches the analyzer to computer mode no echo no edit CR A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the carriage return terminal computer The command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done On personal computers this is achieved by pressing the ENTER key BS Erases one character to the left of the cursor location backspace ESC Erases the entire command line escape ID CR This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used The ID number of the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same communications line such as the multi drop setup Control P Restarts the listing of commands 8 2 1 2 COMMAND SYNTAX Commands are not case sensitive and all arguments within one command i e ID numbers keywords data values etc must be separated with a space character All Commands follow the syntax
319. tration 9 5 3 Activate CO2 Sensor Stability Function 180 10 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE amp PROCEDURES 10 1 Maintenance Schedule 10 2 Predictive Diagnostics 10 3 Maintenance Procedures 10 3 1 Replacing the Sample Particulate Filter 10 3 2 Rebuilding the Sample Pump 10 3 3 Performing Leak Checks 10 3 4 Performing a Sample Flow Check 10 3 5 Cleaning the Optical 10 3 6 Cleaning Exterior Surfaces of the T802 11 TROUBLESHOOTING AND SERVICE 11 1 General Troubleshooting 11 1 1 Fault Diagnosis with WARNING Message 11 1 2 Fault Diagnosis with TEST Functions 11 1 3 DIAG gt SIGNAL I O Using the Diagnostic Signal Function 11 2 Using the Internal Electronic Status LEDs 11 2 1 CPU Status Indicator 11 2 2 Relay PCA Status Indicator 11 3 Gas Flow Problems 11 3 1 T802 Internal Gas Flow Diagrams 11 3 2 Typical Sample Gas Flow Problems 11 4 Calibration Problems 11 4 1 Miscalibrated 11 4 2 Non Repeatable Zero and Span 11 4 3 Inability to Span No SPAN Button 11 4 4 Inability to Zero No ZERO Butto 11 5 Other Performance Problems 11 5 1 Temperature Problems 11 6 Subsystem Checkout 1 AC Mains Configuration DC Power Supply Bus Touchscreen Interfac LCD Display Modul Relay Board Sensor Assembly Pressure Flow Sensor Assembly 11 6 9 Motherboard 11 6 10 CPU
320. ual analyzer components IC Integrated Circuit a modern semi conductor circuit that can contain many basic components such as resistors transistors capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used in electronic assemblies IP Internet Protocol IZS Internal Zero Span LAN Local Area Network LCD Liquid Crystal Display 248 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual A Primer on Electro Static Discharge Term Description Definition LED Light Emitting Diode LPM Liters Per Minute MOLAR MASS the mass expressed in grams of 1 mole of a specific substance Conversely one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the same number in grams as the atomic mass of that substance EXAMPLE The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar mass of Carbon is 12 grams Conversely one mole of carbon equals the amount of carbon atoms that weighs 12 grams Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements NDIR Non Dispersive Infrared NIST SRM National Institute of Standards and Technology Standard Reference Material PC Personal Computer PCA Printed Circuit Assembly the PCB with electronic components ready to use PC AT Personal Computer Advanced Technology PCB Printed Circuit Board the bare board without electronic component PFA Per Fluoro Alkoxy an inert polymer one
321. uctions for selecting the reporting range to be calibrated when the T802 analyzer is set to operate in either the DUAL or AUTO reporting range modes SECTION 9 3 Assessing Calibration Quality This section describes how to judge the effectiveness of a recently performed calibration SECTION 9 4 Calibration of the T802 s Electronic Subsystems This section describes how to perform calibrations of the T802 s electronic systems including e adjusting the analyzers internal flow sensor e adjusting the analyzers internal pressure sensor SECTION 9 5 Calibration of the Optional CO2 Sensor This section describes how to perform calibrations of the optional CO Sensor Throughout this Section are various diagrams showing pneumatic connections between the T802 and various other pieces of equipment such as calibrators and zero air sources These diagrams are only intended to be schematic representations of these connections and do not reflect actual physical locations of equipment and fitting location or orientation Contact your regional EPA or other appropriate governing agency for more detailed recommendations 07275B DCN6418 169 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual 9 1 BEFORE CALIBRATION The calibration procedures in this section assume that the range mode analog range and units of measure have already been selected for the analyzer If this has not been done please
322. ument goes up into the high range it will turn this relay on 3 3 1 8 CONNECTING THE COMMUNICATION INTERFACES The T Series analyzers are equipped with connectors for remote communications interfaces Ethernet USB RS 232 optional RS 232 Multidrop and optional RS 485 In addition to using the appropriate cables Table 1 1 describes the cable options 60A through 60D each type of communication method must be configured using the gt menu Section 5 7 ETHERNET CONNECTION For network or Internet communication with the analyzer connect an Ethernet cable from the analyzer s rear panel Ethernet interface connector to an Ethernet port Configuration Section 6 3 USB OPTION CONNECTION For direct communication between the analyzer and a personal computer PC connect a USB cable between the analyzer and desktop or laptop USB ports If this option is installed the COM2 port can only be used for RS232 multidrop communication USB driver download is required Configuration Section 6 4 RS 232 CONNECTION For RS 232 communications with data terminal equipment DTE or with data communication equipment DCE connect the applicable cable option Table 1 1 either a DB9 female to DB25 male cable Option 60A or a DB9 female to DB9 female cable Option 60B from the analyzer s rear panel RS 232 port to the device Adjust the DCE DTE switch Figure 3 4 to select DTE or DCE as appropriate Configuration Section 6
323. ument is turned back on the DAS begins taking samples and temporarily storing them in volatile memory as part of a new REPORT PERIOD At the end of this REPORT PERIOD only the sample readings taken since the instrument was turned back on will be included in any AVG SDEV MIN or MAX calculation Also the STORE NUM SAMPLE feature will report the number of sample readings taken since the instrument was restarted 7 1 4 6 EDITING THE NUMBER OF RECORDS The number of data records in the DAS is limited by the total number of parameters and channels and other settings in the DAS configuration Every additional data channel parameter number of samples setting etc will reduce the maximum amount of data points somewhat In general however the maximum data capacity is divided amongst all channels max 20 and parameters max 50 per channel The DAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from specifying too many records at any given point If for example the DAS memory space can accommodate 375 more data records the ENTR key will disappear when trying to specify more than that number of records This check for memory space may also make an upload of a DAS configuration with APICOM or a terminal program fail if the combined number of records would be exceeded In this case it is suggested to either try to determine what the maximum number of records available is using the front panel interface or use trial and e
324. ur instrument to operate over a Hessen Protocol network For more detailed information as well as a list of host computer commands and examples of command and response message syntax download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne web site http www teledyne api com manuals 6 5 2 1 HESSEN COM PORT CONFIGURATION Note Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the T802 s COM ports to be set differently than the standard configuration as shown in the table below Table 6 4 RS 232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol PARAMETER STANDARD HESSEN Baud Rate 300 115200 1200 Data Bits 8 7 Stop Bits 1 2 Parity None Even Duplex Full Half To change the baud rate of the T802 s COM ports See Section 6 2 2 To change the rest of the COM port parameters listed in the table above see Section 6 2 and Table 6 1 Make sure that the communication parameters of the host computer are also properly set In addition rather than issuing commands to the instrument in rapid succession bear in mind that the instrument software has a 200 ms latency period before it responds to commands issued by the host computer 128 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 6 5 2 2 ACTIVATING HESSEN PROTOCOL Once the COM port has been properly configured the next step in configuring the T802 to operate over a Hesse
325. ure This sensor is mounted to a printed circuit board with the sample flow sensor on the sample chamber see the following section and Figure 3 5 12 4 3 2 SAMPLE FLOW SENSOR A thermal mass flow sensor is used to measure the sample flow through the analyzer The sensor is calibrated at the factory with ambient air or but can be calibrated to operate with samples consisting of other gases such as O This sensor is mounted to a printed circuit board with the Sample Pressure sensor on the sample chamber see the previous section and Figure 3 5 12 5 ELECTRONIC OPERATION 12 5 1 OVERVIEW Figure 10 9 shows a block diagram of the major electronic components of the T802 At its heart the analyzer is a microcomputer CPU that controls various internal processes interprets data makes calculations and reports results using specialized firmware developed by Teledyne API It communicates with the user as well as receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices via a separate printed circuit assembly called the Motherboard The motherboard collects data performs signal conditioning duties and routes incoming and outgoing signals between the CPU and the analyzer s other major components Data is generated by a gas filter correlation optical bench which outputs an analog signal corresponding to the concentration of in the sample gas This analog signal is converted into digital data by a unipolar analog to di
326. ute warm up period investigate their cause using the troubleshooting guidelines in Section 11 To view and clear warning messages press SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET Suppresses the aub e warning messages SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET TEST CAL MSG CLR SETUP MSG returns the active warnings to the message field If a warning message persists after several attempts to clear it the message SYSTEM RESET may indicate a real problem and not an Press CLR to clear the current artifact of the warm up period CAL MSG CLR SETUP message more than one warning is active the next message will take SYSTEM SYSTEM RESET its place TEST CLR SETUP Once the last warning has been cleared the RANGE function will be displayed in the analyzer s main STANDBY RANGE 100 00 02 XXX XX MESSAGE FIELD YEST ca 561 Figure 3 19 Viewing and Clearing T802 WARNING Messages Table 3 10 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during startup 07275B DCN6418 53 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual Table 3 10 Warning Messages MESSAGE MEANING ANALOG CAL WARNING The instrument s A D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated BOX TEMP WARN The temperature inside the chassis is outside the specified limits CANNOT
327. uttons to set the days between reports 0 366 po oe UP ISETUP X X REPORT PERIOD TIME 00 05 1 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting Press buttons to set amount of time in hours and minutes between reports in the format HH MM max 23 59 ENTR accepts the new setting J gt The SAMPLE PERIOD and REPORT PERIOD intervals are synchronized to the beginning and end of the appropriate interval of the instrument s internal clock If SAMPLE Period were set for one minute the first reading would occur at the beginning of the next full minute according to the instrument s internal clock If the Report period were set for one hour the first report activity would occur at the beginning of the next full hour according to the instrument s internal clock EXAMPLE Given the above settings if DAS were activated at 7 57 35 the first sample would occur at 7 58 and the first report would be calculated at 8 00 consisting of data points for 7 58 7 59 and 8 00 During the next hour from 8 01 to 9 00 the instrument will take a sample reading every minute and include 60 sample readings 150 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O Analyzer Operation Manual 7 1 4 5 REPORT PERIODS IN PROGRESS WHEN INSTRUMENT IS POWERED OFF If the instrument is powered off in the middle of a REPORT PERIOD the samples accumulated so far during that period are lost Once the instr
328. via the analyzer s Analog Outputs Output A3 To set the upper range limit for each independent reporting range press SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 ISETUP X X PRIMARY SETUP MENU ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP RANGE MODE MENU MODE SET XX O2RANGE 1 100 00 1 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP X X O2 RANGE 2 100 00 1 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to select the upper SPAN limit for the reporting ranges 27 5 0 Toggle these buttons to select the upper SPAN limit for the CO2 reporting range NOTE Only appears if the optional CO2 Sensor is installed 27 ACAL submenu the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the new setting 07275B DCN6418 75 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic Analyzer Operation Manual 5 4 3 3 RNGE gt MODE gt AUTO CONFIGURING THE T802 ANALYZER FOR AUTO RANGE MODE In AUTO range mode the analyzer automatically switches the reporting range between two user defined ranges low and high e unit will switch from low range to high range when the O concentration exceeds 98 of the low range span e The unit will return from high range back to low range once the concentration falls below 75 of the low range span In AUTO
329. w ET setting ENTR accepts the new setting 116 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne 7802 Analyzer Operation Manual 6 2 3 COM PORT TESTING Test Runs Automatically The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COM menu This test sends a string of 256 w characters to the selected COM port While the test is running the red LED on the rear panel of the analyzer should flicker To initiate the test press the following menu sequence RANGE 100 00 SETUP XX PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP XX SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG COMMUNICATIONS MENU D INET eom 2 1 MODE 0 SET SET EDIT Continue pressing lt SET or SET gt until m COM1 TEST PORT lt SET SET gt TEST TRANSMITTING TO COM1 COM1 TEST PORT PREV NEXT TEST The ACAL submenu in the Primary Setup Menu is a special configuration consult factory 07275B DCN6418 Section Il Operating Instructions Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 6 3 REMOTE ACCESS VIA THE ETHERNET For network or Internet communication the analyzer can be connected to any standard 10BaseT or 100BaseT Ethernet network via low cost network hubs switches or routers The interface operates as a standard TCP IP device on port 3000 This allows a remote computer to connect through the Internet to the ana
330. www teledyne api com or contact api sales teledyne com NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT TRADEMARKS 2010 2013 Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation All rights reserved All trademarks registered trademarks brand names or product names appearing in this document are the property of their respective owners and are used herein for identification purposes only 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank ii 07275B DCN6418 SAFETY MESSAGES eb PPP Important safety messages are provided throughout this manual for the purpose of avoiding personal injury or instrument damage Please read these messages carefully Each safety message is associated with a safety alert symbol and are placed throughout this manual the safety symbols are also located inside the instrument It is imperative that you pay close attention to these messages the descriptions of which are as follows WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard HAZARD Strong oxidizer GENERAL WARNING CAUTION Read the accompanying message for specific information CAUTION Hot Surface Warning Do Not Touch Touching some parts of the instrument without protection or proper tools could result in damage to the part s and or the instrument Technician Symbol All operations marked with this symbol are to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only Electrical Ground This symbol insid
331. y 07275B DCNd 38 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual IMPORTANT IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA DAS operation is suspended whenever its configuration is edited using the analyzer s front panel and therefore data may be lost To prevent such data loss it is recommended to use the APICOM graphical user interface for DAS changes Please be aware that all stored data will be erased if the analyzer s disk on module or CPU board is replaced or if the configuration data stored there is reset 7 1 DAS STRUCTURE The DAS is designed around the feature of a record A record is a single data point The type of data recorded in a record is defined by two properties e PARAMETER type that defines the kind of data to be stored e g the average of gas concentrations measured with three digits of precision See Section 7 1 4 3 e ATRIGGER event that defines when the record is made e g timer every time a calibration is performed etc See Section 7 1 4 2 The specific PARAMETER and TRIGGER events that describe an individual record are defined in a construct called a DATA CHANNEL Each data channel relates one or more parameters with a specific trigger event and various other operational characteristics related to the records being made e g the channel s name number of records to be made time period between records whether or not the record is exported via the analyzer s RS 232 po
332. y strokes shows how to edit using the front panel SAMPLE RANGE 100 00 O22XXX XX T SETUP SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT DAS EDIT Touchscreen Functions Button FUNCTION Main DAS Menu SETUP DATA ACQUISITION PREV Selects the previous data channel in the list NEXT Selects the next data channel in the list INS Inserts a new data channel into the list BEFORE the selected channel DEL Deletes the currently selected data channel TUP X X ENTER PASSWORD 818 Enters EDIT mode 8 ENTR EXIT EDI Exports the configuration of all data channels to the PRINT RS 232 interface EDIT Channel Menu Buttons only appear when applicable SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 RS232 NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Enters EDIT mode for the selected channel When editing the data channels the top line of the display indicates some of the configuration parameters For example the display line 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 RS232 Translates to the following configuration 0 Channel No CONC Channel Name ATIMER Trigger Event 2 Parameters number of parameters included in this channel 4032 Event number of data points this channel is set up to store RS 232 Portvia which values automatically reported 144 07275B DCN6418 Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 7 1 4 1 EDITING D
333. yzer Operation Manual WARNINGS Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning messages appears such as O2TMPW O sensor temperature warning This is helpful for trouble shooting by monitoring when a particular warning occurred To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel follow the instruction shown in Section 7 1 4 then press Starting at the EDIT CHANNEL MENU SETUP X X 0 CONC ATIMER 2 4032 RS232 NEXT INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X X NAME CONC SET gt EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET or SET until SETUP X X EVENT ATIMER SET gt EDIT EXIT SETUP X X EVENT ATIMER PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT EXIT discards the new setting ENTR accepts the Toggle these new setting buttons to cycle through the list of available trigger event Note DAS Trigger Events are firmware specific a list of trigger events can be found in Appendix A 5 of this manual 7 1 4 3 EDITING DAS PARAMETERS Data parameters are types of data that may be measured and stored by the DAS For each Teledyne API analyzer model the list of available data parameters is different fully defined and not customizable Appendix A 5 lists firmware specific data parameters for the T802 DAS parameters include things like O concentration measurements temperatures of the various heaters placed around the analyzer pressures and flows of th
334. zero to be incorrect Again the analyzer is being calibrated to the wrong value Too many analyzers on the manifold This can cause either a slope or offset error because ambient gas with its pollutants will dilute the zero or span gas 11 4 2 NON REPEATABLE ZERO AND SPAN As stated earlier leaks both in the T802 and in the external system are a common source of unstable and non repeatable readings 1 Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 10 3 3 Don t forget to consider pneumatic components in the gas delivery system outside the T802 Such as Achange in zero air source such as ambient air leaking into zero air line or Achange in the span gas concentration due to zero air or ambient air leaking into the span gas line Once the instrument passes a leak check do a flow check See Section 10 3 4 to make sure adequate sample is being delivered to the sensor assembly Confirm the sample pressure wheel temperature bench temperature and sample flow readings are correct and have steady readings 07275B DCN6418 207 Troubleshooting and Service Teledyne T802 Paramagnetic O2 Analyzer Operation Manual 4 Disconnect the exhaust line from the optical bench near the rear of the instrument and plug this line into the SAMPLE inlet creating a pneumatic loop The concentration either zero or span now must be constant If readings become quiet the problem is in the external pneumati

Teledyne T802 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents